[go: up one dir, main page]

TWI783131B - Composite sheet for forming protective film - Google Patents

Composite sheet for forming protective film Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI783131B
TWI783131B TW108109742A TW108109742A TWI783131B TW I783131 B TWI783131 B TW I783131B TW 108109742 A TW108109742 A TW 108109742A TW 108109742 A TW108109742 A TW 108109742A TW I783131 B TWI783131 B TW I783131B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
protective film
forming
mentioned
meth
film
Prior art date
Application number
TW108109742A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201946128A (en
Inventor
佐伯尚哉
古野健太
Original Assignee
日商琳得科股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商琳得科股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商琳得科股份有限公司
Publication of TW201946128A publication Critical patent/TW201946128A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI783131B publication Critical patent/TWI783131B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/30Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by the adhesive composition
    • C09J7/38Pressure-sensitive adhesives [PSA]
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J133/00Adhesives based on homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and at least one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides, or nitriles thereof; Adhesives based on derivatives of such polymers
    • C09J133/04Homopolymers or copolymers of esters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/20Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by their carriers
    • C09J7/22Plastics; Metallised plastics
    • C09J7/25Plastics; Metallised plastics based on macromolecular compounds obtained otherwise than by reactions involving only carbon-to-carbon unsaturated bonds
    • C09J7/255Polyesters
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J7/00Adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J7/40Adhesives in the form of films or foils characterised by release liners
    • H10W74/01
    • H10W99/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2203/00Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2203/326Applications of adhesives in processes or use of adhesives in the form of films or foils for bonding electronic components such as wafers, chips or semiconductors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/20Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the structural features of the adhesive itself
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09JADHESIVES; NON-MECHANICAL ASPECTS OF ADHESIVE PROCESSES IN GENERAL; ADHESIVE PROCESSES NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE; USE OF MATERIALS AS ADHESIVES
    • C09J2301/00Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils
    • C09J2301/30Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier
    • C09J2301/312Additional features of adhesives in the form of films or foils characterized by the chemical, physicochemical or physical properties of the adhesive or the carrier parameters being the characterizing feature

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Adhesive Tapes (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)
  • Dicing (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Physical Vapour Deposition (AREA)

Abstract

A supporting sheet of the present invention includes a substrate and an adhesive layer on the substrate, wherein the surface of the adhesive layer side of the substrate is an uneven surface, and when 3 mm by 3 mm test pieces are cut from five locations on the supporting sheet and the minimum and maximum thicknesses of each of the adhesive layers are measured, the ratio of the average maximum value (L value) to the average minimum value (S value) (L value/S value) is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0. A composite sheet for forming a protective film includes a film for forming the protective film on the adhesive layer in the supporting sheet.

Description

保護膜形成用複合片 Composite sheet for protective film formation

本發明係關於支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片。 The present invention relates to a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film.

近年,採用通稱「倒置(face down)方式」安裝法進行半導體裝置製造。倒置方式係使用電路面上設有凸塊等電極的半導體晶片,由上述電極接合於基板。因而,半導體晶片雙面中設有電路面之一面的對向面便呈裸露狀態。 In recent years, semiconductor devices have been manufactured using a mounting method known as a "face down method". The inverted method uses a semiconductor wafer with electrodes such as bumps on the circuit surface, and the electrodes are bonded to the substrate. Therefore, the opposite surface of one of the two sides of the semiconductor wafer on which the circuit is provided is exposed.

在該呈裸露的半導體晶片背面上形成當作保護膜用之含有機材料的樹脂膜,再依具保護膜之半導體晶片形式組裝於半導體裝置中。保護膜係為在切割步驟、封裝之後,能防止半導體晶片發生龜裂而使用。 A resin film containing an organic material used as a protective film is formed on the back surface of the bare semiconductor chip, and then assembled in a semiconductor device in the form of a semiconductor chip with a protective film. The protective film is used to prevent cracking of the semiconductor wafer after dicing and packaging.

此種保護膜係例如藉由使具硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜進行硬化而形成。又,經調節物性的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可直接利用為保護膜。所以,保護膜形成用薄膜係使用於貼附在半導體晶圓的背面。保護膜形成用薄膜亦有在例如與半導體晶圓加工時所使用支撐片呈一體化的保護膜形成用複合片狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面上,亦有在未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下貼附於半導體晶圓背面上。 Such a protective film is formed, for example, by curing a thin film for forming a curable protective film. Moreover, the film for non-curable protective film formation whose physical properties were adjusted can also be used as a protective film as it is. Therefore, the thin film for protective film formation is used for sticking on the back surface of a semiconductor wafer. For example, the film for forming a protective film is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer in the state of a composite sheet for forming a protective film integrated with the support used in semiconductor wafer processing, or it is not integrated with the support. Attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer in the melted state.

保護膜形成用複合片係利用其中的保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶片背面後,再依各自的合適時序施行例如:利用保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化形成保護膜、保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜之切斷、半導體晶圓分割(切割)為半導體晶片、以及從支撐片上拾取背面具有經切斷後保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜的半導體晶片(具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片或具保護膜之半導體晶片)等。而,在拾取具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片時,藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化而成為具保護膜之半導體晶片,最終使用具保護膜之半導體晶片製造半導體裝置。依此,保護膜形成用複合片中的支撐片可利用為切割片。另外,當保護膜形成用薄膜係非硬化性的情況,在該等各項步驟中,保護膜形成用薄膜直接被使用為保護膜。The composite sheet for forming a protective film is attached to the back of the semiconductor wafer by using the film for forming a protective film, and then it is carried out in an appropriate sequence. Cutting of the protective film, dividing (cutting) the semiconductor wafer into semiconductor wafers, and picking up the semiconductor wafer with the film for forming the protective film after cutting or the protective film on the back from the support sheet (the semiconductor wafer with the thin film for forming the protective film or the semiconductor wafer with the protective film protective film for semiconductor wafers), etc. And, when picking up the semiconductor wafer with the thin film for forming a protective film, the semiconductor wafer with a protective film is formed by curing of the thin film for forming a protective film, and finally a semiconductor device is manufactured using the semiconductor wafer with a protective film. According to this, the support sheet in the composite sheet for protective film formation can be utilized as a dicing sheet. In addition, when the thin film for protective film formation is non-curable, in each of these steps, the thin film for protective film formation is used as it is as a protective film.

另一方面,保護膜形成用薄膜在未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面之後,在該保護膜形成用薄膜雙面中,於臨半導體晶圓貼附面之對向的露出面上貼附著支撐片。其餘以後均依照與上述使用保護膜形成用複合片的情況為相同方法,獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片或具保護膜形成用薄膜之半導體晶片,並製造半導體裝置。此情況,保護膜形成用薄膜係依未與支撐片呈一體化狀態下,貼附於半導體晶圓背面,但藉由與貼附後的支撐片呈一體化,而構成保護膜形成用複合片。On the other hand, after the film for forming a protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer without being integrated with the support sheet, on both sides of the film for forming a protective film, on the side opposite to the surface to which the semiconductor wafer is attached, A support sheet is pasted on the exposed surface. For the rest, the semiconductor wafer with a protective film or the semiconductor wafer with a thin film for forming a protective film is obtained by the same method as the above-mentioned case of using the composite sheet for forming a protective film, and a semiconductor device is manufactured. In this case, the film for forming a protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer without being integrated with the support sheet, but the composite sheet for forming a protective film is formed by being integrated with the attached support sheet .

針對此種保護膜形成用複合片,例如有揭示切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜,係具備有:切割膠帶(支撐片)與半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)的切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用複合片),而該切割膠帶(支撐片)係具有:具凹凸加工面之基材、與積層於該基材之上述凹凸加工面上的黏著劑層;該半導體背面保護用薄膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)係積層於該切割膠帶的黏著劑層上;其中,上述切割膠帶的霧度係45%以下(參照專利文獻1)。For such a composite sheet for forming a protective film, there is disclosed, for example, a dicing tape-integrated film for protecting the back of a semiconductor, which is a dicing tape comprising a dicing tape (support sheet) and a film for protecting the back of a semiconductor (film for forming a protective film). A film for protecting the back surface of a bulk semiconductor (composite sheet for forming a protective film), and the dicing tape (support sheet) has: a substrate having a concave-convex processed surface, and an adhesive layer laminated on the concave-convex processed surface of the substrate The film for protecting the semiconductor back surface (film for forming a protective film) is laminated on the adhesive layer of the dicing tape; wherein, the haze of the above-mentioned dicing tape is 45% or less (refer to Patent Document 1).

但是,專利文獻1所揭示的保護膜形成用複合片(切割膠帶一體型半導體背面保護用薄膜),因為係在基材的凹凸加工面上積層黏著劑層,因而會有黏著劑無法充分追隨基材的凹凸,導致在基材與黏著劑間會有發生剝離。又,對保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜的黏著劑層之一面,會有利用雷射照射而施行刻印的情形,但黏著劑層的厚度不均勻,在黏著劑層較厚部位處,會有隔著基材與黏著劑層的刻印檢視性降低之情況。 [先行技術文獻] [專利文獻]However, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film (the film for protecting the back surface of a semiconductor integrated with dicing tape) disclosed in Patent Document 1, since the adhesive layer is laminated on the uneven surface of the base material, the adhesive cannot sufficiently follow the substrate. The unevenness of the material will cause peeling between the base material and the adhesive. In addition, marking may be performed by laser irradiation on one side of the adhesive layer of the protective film or the film for protective film formation, but the thickness of the adhesive layer is not uniform, and there may be gaps at the thicker portion of the adhesive layer. When the marking visibility through the base material and the adhesive layer is reduced. [Prior Art Literature] [Patent Document]

[專利文獻1]日本專利第5432853號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent No. 5432853

(發明所欲解決之課題)(Problem to be solved by the invention)

本發明目的在於提供支撐片以及包括上述支撐片的保護膜形成用複合片,在基材的凹凸面側設有黏著劑層構成的支撐片,在其黏著劑層上設有保護膜形成用薄膜的保護膜形成用複合片中,可實現基材與黏著劑層間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的良好刻印檢視性。 (解決課題之技術手段)The object of the present invention is to provide a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film including the above-mentioned support sheet. In the composite sheet for forming a protective film, good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive layer, and good marking visibility of the protective film or film for forming a protective film through the support sheet can be realized. (Technical means to solve the problem)

本發明所提供的支撐片,係包括基材,且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片,其中,上述基材臨上述黏著劑層側的面係凹凸面;從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,針對這5片試驗片分別求取黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值時,上述最大值的平均值相對於上述最小值的平均值之比率係1.2以上且未滿5.0。The supporting sheet provided by the present invention is a supporting sheet comprising a base material, and an adhesive layer is provided on the above-mentioned base material, wherein, the surface of the above-mentioned base material facing the above-mentioned adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface; Cut test pieces from 5 places, and calculate the minimum value and maximum value of the adhesive layer thickness for these 5 test pieces, the ratio of the average value of the above maximum value to the average value of the above minimum value is 1.2 or more and less than 1.2 5.0.

本發明的支撐片,上述黏著劑層亦可直接接觸於上述基材的凹凸面。 再者,本發明所提供的保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上設置保護膜形成用薄膜。 [發明效果]In the support sheet of the present invention, the adhesive layer may also be in direct contact with the concave-convex surface of the substrate. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film provided by the present invention, a thin film for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer in the support sheet. [Invention effect]

藉由使用本發明的支撐片構成保護膜形成用複合片,便可實現基材與黏著劑間之良好密接性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的良好刻印檢視性。By constituting the protective film-forming composite sheet using the support sheet of the present invention, good adhesion between the base material and the adhesive, and good marking visibility of the protective film or protective film-forming film through the support sheet can be realized.

◇支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片 本發明一實施形態的支撐片,係包括基材,且在上述基材上設有黏著劑層的支撐片,其中,上述基材臨上述黏著劑層側的面係凹凸面;從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,針對這5片試驗片分別求取黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值時,上述最大值的平均值(本說明書中,有時稱「L值」),相對於上述最小值的平均值(本說明書中,有時稱「S值」)之比率(L值/S值),係1.2以上且未滿5.0。 再者,本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上設有保護膜形成用薄膜。◇Composite sheet for support sheet and protective film formation A support sheet according to an embodiment of the present invention is a support sheet comprising a substrate and an adhesive layer is provided on the substrate, wherein the surface of the substrate facing the adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface; from the support sheet When the test pieces are cut from 5 places in the test piece, and the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer are calculated for these 5 test pieces, the average value of the above maximum value (in this specification, sometimes called "L value") is relatively The ratio (L value/S value) of the average value (in this specification, sometimes referred to as "S value") of the above-mentioned minimum value is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to one embodiment of the present invention, a thin film for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer in the support sheet.

上述支撐片係在基材的凹凸面側設有黏著劑層,包括此支撐片構成的保護膜形成用複合片,黏著劑層將充分追隨該基材的凹凸面,抑制基材與黏著劑層間的剝離情形。 更具體而言,當上述黏著劑層的L值相對於上述黏著劑層的S值之比率(L值/S值)達1.2以上時,因為黏著劑層會充分追隨基材的凹凸,基材與黏著劑層間不會發生剝離,使基材與黏著劑層間之密接性良好。 另一方面,當上述黏著劑層的L值相對於上述黏著劑層的S值之比率(L值/S值)未滿5.0時,保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性呈良好。The above-mentioned support sheet is provided with an adhesive layer on the concave-convex surface side of the substrate, and the composite sheet for forming a protective film including this support sheet will fully follow the concave-convex surface of the substrate, and the gap between the substrate and the adhesive layer will be suppressed. the stripping situation. More specifically, when the ratio of the L value of the adhesive layer to the S value of the adhesive layer (L value/S value) is 1.2 or more, since the adhesive layer sufficiently follows the unevenness of the base material, the base material There will be no peeling between the adhesive layer and the adhesion between the base material and the adhesive layer. On the other hand, when the ratio of the L value of the adhesive layer to the S value of the adhesive layer (L value/S value) is less than 5.0, the marking inspection of the protective film or protective film forming film through the support sheet Sex was good.

上述試驗片係從支撐片的5個地方切取,將支撐片在其厚度方向整個切斷而獲得。試驗片係包括構成支撐片所有層的小片。The said test piece was cut out from 5 places of a support sheet, and it cut|disconnected the whole support sheet in the thickness direction. The test piece consists of small pieces that make up all the layers of the support piece.

試驗片的大小並無特別的限定,較佳係構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面1邊長度達2mm以上。藉由使用此種大小的試驗片,便可以更高精度求得黏著劑層的S值與L值。 上述1邊長度的最大值並無特別的限定。例如就從試驗片製作更容易的觀點,上述1邊的長度較佳係在10mm以下。The size of the test piece is not particularly limited, but it is preferable that the length of one side of the laminated layer or the exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is 2 mm or more. By using a test piece of this size, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher accuracy. The maximum value of the length of one side is not particularly limited. For example, the length of one side is preferably 10 mm or less from the viewpoint of easiness of test piece preparation.

試驗片的平面形狀─即,構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面之形狀,較佳係多邊形狀,就從試驗片切取更容易的觀點,更佳係四邊形狀。The planar shape of the test piece—that is, the shape of the laminated surface or exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) that constitutes the test piece is preferably a polygonal shape, and it is more preferably a quadrilateral shape from the viewpoint of easier cutting of the test piece shape.

試驗片較佳係可舉例如構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)的積層面或露出面大小呈3mm×3mm四邊形狀。但,此僅為較佳試驗片一例而已。The test piece is preferably, for example, the laminated surface or the exposed surface of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) constituting the test piece is in a quadrangular shape of 3mm×3mm. However, this is only an example of a preferred test piece.

支撐片在試驗片的5個地方切取位置並無特別的限定,為能更高精度求取黏著劑層的S值與L值,可經考慮後述保護膜形成用薄膜的積層預定位置才再行選擇。 例如支撐片在1片保護膜形成用薄膜的積層預定位置中,選擇屬於配置預定的保護膜形成用薄膜中心(重心)部之1個地方,以及靠近保護膜形成用薄膜周緣部位處、且相對於此中心(重心)部幾乎成點對稱位置配置預定的4個地方等5個地方。There are no special restrictions on the cutting position of the support sheet in the 5 places of the test piece. In order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer with higher accuracy, it can be done after considering the predetermined lamination position of the protective film forming film described later. choose. For example, among the planned lamination positions of one film for forming a protective film, select a place belonging to the center (centre of gravity) of the film for forming a protective film to be arranged, and a place close to the peripheral edge of the film for forming a protective film and opposite to each other. In this central (center of gravity) portion, five places including predetermined four places are arranged in almost point-symmetrical positions.

支撐片中,試驗片切取位置的中心(重心)間距離較佳係50~200mm。藉由依此設定,便可以更高精度求得黏著劑層的S值與L值。In the supporting sheet, the distance between the center (center of gravity) of the cutting position of the test piece is preferably 50~200mm. By setting in this way, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can be obtained with higher precision.

為能從試驗片求得黏著劑層的S值與L值,便針對試驗片重新形成截面,再針對此形成的截面,便在各個試驗片逐一測定黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值。 重新形成的截面係針對1片試驗片可僅有1面、亦可達2面以上,但通常僅1面便足夠。 然後,從這些至少5個最小值與最大值便可計算出S值與L值。In order to obtain the S value and L value of the adhesive layer from the test piece, the cross-section of the test piece was re-formed, and then the minimum and maximum thickness of the adhesive layer were measured on each test piece one by one for the formed cross-section. The newly formed cross-section may have only one side, or may have two or more sides for one test piece, but usually only one side is sufficient. Then, the S value and L value can be calculated from these at least 5 minimum and maximum values.

試驗片係可依照公知方法形成截面。例如藉由使用公知截面試料製作裝置(截面拋光機),便可以抑制變動、高重現性,在試驗片中形成截面。The cross section of the test piece can be formed according to a known method. For example, by using a known cross-section sample preparation device (cross-section polishing machine), it is possible to form a cross-section in a test piece with suppressed variation and high reproducibility.

黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察試驗片的上述截面便可測定。The minimum and maximum thicknesses of the adhesive layer can be measured by observing the above-mentioned cross-section of the test piece, for example, using a scanning electron microscope (SEM).

各試驗片的上述截面中,測定黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值的區域,以在構成試驗片各層(基材、黏著劑層等)積層方向的正交方向(大致相對於各層積層面或露出面的平行方向)的50~1500μm的區域為佳。藉由依此設定,便可以高效率且高精度測定黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值。In the above cross-section of each test piece, measure the area of the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer, so that the thickness of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, etc.) that constitutes the test piece is perpendicular to the lamination direction (approximately relative to each lamination layer). Or the parallel direction of the exposed surface) is preferably a region of 50-1500 μm. By setting according to this, the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer can be measured with high efficiency and high precision.

針對尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片、與已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,比較黏著劑層的厚度最小值時,其最小值係相互相同、或已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之上述最小值為略小,其差值在這麼小的情況仍屬於可忽視的程度。 關於黏著劑層的厚度最大值亦同。即,在尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片階段的支撐片、與已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之間,若比較黏著劑層的厚度最大值時,其最大值係相互相同、或已構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之上述最大值略為小,在這麼小的情況,其差值屬於可忽視的程度。 所以,不使用支撐片而使用從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,依照與使用從支撐片所切取試驗片情況的相同方法亦可求取黏著劑層的S值與L值。依此使用從保護膜形成用複合片所切取的試驗片時,若黏著劑層L值相對於黏著劑層S值的比率(L值/S值)係1.2以上且未滿5.0時,此保護膜形成用複合片便反映出上述本發明的效果。When comparing the minimum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer between the support sheet that has not yet constituted the composite sheet for protective film formation and the support sheet that has constituted the composite sheet for protective film formation, the minimum values are the same as each other, or the minimum value has been formed. The above-mentioned minimum value of the support sheet of the composite sheet for film formation is slightly smaller, and the difference is still negligible even when it is so small. The same applies to the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer. That is, when the maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer is compared between the support sheet that has not yet constituted the composite sheet for protective film formation and the support sheet that has constituted the composite sheet for protective film formation, the maximum values are the same as each other, or The above-mentioned maximum value of the support sheet constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film is slightly small, and when it is so small, the difference is negligible. Therefore, the S value and L value of the adhesive layer can also be obtained by using the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation instead of the support sheet in the same way as when using the test piece cut out from the support sheet. When using the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation according to this, if the ratio of the L value of the adhesive layer to the S value of the adhesive layer (L value/S value) is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0, the protection The composite sheet for film formation reflects the above-mentioned effects of the present invention.

即,本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片,係在上述支撐片中的黏著劑層上,設有保護膜形成用薄膜的保護膜形成用複合片;其中,從上述保護膜形成用複合片的5個地方切取試驗片,再針對這5片試驗片分別求取黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值時,上述最大值平均值(L值)相對於上述最小值平均值(S值)的比率(L值/S值)係1.2以上且未滿5.0。That is, a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is a composite sheet for forming a protective film in which a thin film for forming a protective film is provided on the adhesive layer of the support sheet; When the test pieces are cut from 5 places of the composite sheet, and then the minimum value and maximum value of the thickness of the adhesive layer are calculated for the 5 test pieces, the average value of the above maximum value (L value) is relative to the average value of the above minimum value (S value) ratio (L value/S value) is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0.

另外,從保護膜形成用複合片切取的試驗片,係將保護膜形成用複合片在厚度方向整個切斷而獲得,包括構成保護膜形成用複合片之所有層的小片。In addition, the test piece cut out from the composite sheet for protective film formation was obtained by cutting the composite sheet for protective film formation in the thickness direction, and included the small pieces which constituted all the layers of the composite sheet for protective film formation.

以下,參照圖式,針對本發明保護膜形成用複合片的全體構成進行說明。另外,以下說明所使用的圖,為能容易瞭解本發明特徵,為了方便有將重要部位予以部分放大圖示的情況,各構成要件的尺寸比率等不一定同實際尺寸。Hereinafter, the overall structure of the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention is demonstrated, referring drawings. In addition, in the drawings used in the following description, in order to facilitate the understanding of the features of the present invention, some important parts may be enlarged and shown for convenience, and the dimensional ratio of each component may not necessarily be the same as the actual size.

圖1所示係本發明一實施形態的支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之示意剖視圖。 此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1A係包括基材11,在基材11上設有黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12上設有保護膜形成用薄膜13。支撐片10係基材11與黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1A,換言之係具有在支撐片10其中一面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)10a上,積層保護膜形成用薄膜13的構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1A係更進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜13上設有剝離薄膜15。FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown here includes the base material 11, the adhesive agent layer 12 is provided on the base material 11, and the film 13 for protective film formation is provided on the adhesive agent layer 12. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, in other words, has a laminated protective layer on one side (also referred to as "the first surface" in this specification) 10a of the support sheet 10. Configuration of the thin film 13 for film formation. Moreover, 1 A of composite sheets for protective film formation are provided with the peeling film 15 on the film 13 for protective film formation further.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,在基材11其中一面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)11a積層黏著劑層12,在黏著劑層12臨基材11側的相反側之面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)12a的全面,積層保護膜形成用薄膜13,在保護膜形成用薄膜13臨黏著劑層12側的相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第1面」)13a其中一部分(即周緣部附近的區域),積層夾具用接著劑層16,在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a中未積層著夾具用接著劑層16之一面、與夾具用接著劑層16未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜13之一面16a(上面與側面),積層剝離薄膜15。 另外,圖1中,元件符號13b係表示保護膜形成用薄膜13臨黏著劑層12側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on one side (also referred to as "the first side" in this specification) 11a of the base material 11, and an adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the side opposite to the side of the base material 11 ( Also referred to as "the first surface" in this specification) 12a, the protective film forming film 13 is laminated on the surface opposite to the side of the protective film forming film 13 facing the adhesive layer 12 (also referred to as "the first surface" in this specification). Surface ") 13a (i.e., the area near the peripheral edge), the adhesive layer 16 for the jig is laminated, and the first surface 13a of the film 13 for forming a protective film is not laminated with the adhesive layer 16 for the jig. The release film 15 is laminated with the adhesive layer 16 not in contact with one side 16a (upper surface and side surfaces) of the film 13 for forming a protective film. In addition, in FIG. 1, element code|symbol 13b has shown the surface (also called "2nd surface" in this specification) of the film 13 for protective film formation which faces the adhesive agent layer 12 side.

夾具用接著劑層16亦可例如含有接著劑成分的單層構造,亦可在成為芯材的片材雙面上積層著含接著劑成分之層而構成複數層構造。The jig adhesive layer 16 may have, for example, a single-layer structure containing an adhesive component, or may have a multi-layer structure by laminating layers containing an adhesive component on both sides of a core sheet.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態而設置。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)12b係凹凸面。In 1 A of composite sheets for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven|corrugated surface. In addition, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in the state which directly contacts the 1st surface (concave-convex surface) 11a of the base material 11. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 on the side facing the substrate 11 (also referred to as "the second surface" in this specification) is a concave-convex surface.

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,基材11臨黏著劑層12側的相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)11b係可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面、亮澤面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。基材11的第2面11b亦可謂為支撐片10臨保護膜形成用薄膜13側的相反側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)10b。 關於「凹凸面」、「平滑面」,容後詳述。In the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film, the surface 11b of the substrate 11 on the side opposite to the adhesive layer 12 (also referred to as "the second surface" in this specification) 11b may be a concave-convex surface or a smooth surface (non-concave-convex surface, bright surface). glossy surface), but smooth surface is preferred. The second surface 11b of the substrate 11 can also be referred to as a surface (also referred to as a "second surface" in this specification) 10b of the support sheet 10 on the side opposite to the film 13 for forming a protective film. About "concave-convex surface" and "smooth surface", details will be given later.

圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A係在已去除剝離薄膜15的狀態下,在保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面,更在夾具用接著劑層16的面16a中,於上面貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。The composite sheet 1A for forming the protective film shown in FIG. On the surface 16a of the adhesive layer 16, jigs such as a ring frame are attached to the upper surface and used.

圖2係一起顯示本發明另一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片之示意剖視圖。 另外,在圖2以後的圖中,針對已說明過的圖式所示相同構成要件,便賦予與該說明過圖式相同的元件符號,並省略詳細說明。Fig. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to another embodiment of the present invention together. In addition, in FIG. 2 and subsequent figures, the same component elements shown in the already-described figures are given the same reference numerals as those in the previously-described figures, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1B係未設置夾具用接著劑層16之外,與圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A相同。即,保護膜形成用複合片1B中,在基材11的第1面11a積層黏著劑層12,並在黏著劑層12的第1面12a全面積層保護膜形成用薄膜13,更於保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a全面積層剝離薄膜15。The composite sheet 1B for protective film formation shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown in FIG. 1 except that the adhesive layer 16 for jigs is not provided. That is, in the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11a of the base material 11, and the film 13 for forming a protective film is laminated on the entire first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12. The release film 15 is laminated on the entire first surface 13 a of the forming film 13 .

保護膜形成用複合片1B中,亦是基材11的第1面11a屬於凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係呈直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態而設置。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11側的面(第2面)12b係凹凸面。 保護膜形成用複合片1B中,亦是基材11的第2面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第2面10b)可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。Also in the composite sheet 1B for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 belongs to an uneven|corrugated surface. Furthermore, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in a state of being in direct contact with the first surface (concave-convex surface) 11 a of the base material 11 . Therefore, the surface (second surface) 12b of the adhesive layer 12 on the side facing the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. In the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the base material 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be either an uneven surface or a smooth surface (non-uneven surface). A smooth surface is preferred.

圖2所示保護膜形成用複合片1B係在已去除剝離薄膜15的狀態下,於保護膜形成用薄膜13的第1面13a中,在中央側其中一部分區域處貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示),更在周緣附近區域處貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。The protective film forming composite sheet 1B shown in FIG. 2 is in a state where the peeling film 15 has been removed, and a semiconductor wafer (not shown) is attached to a part of the central side of the first surface 13a of the protective film forming film 13. As shown in the figure), a jig such as a ring frame is attached to the area near the periphery for use.

圖3所示係本發明再另一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片之示意剖視圖。 此處所示保護膜形成用複合片1C係除了保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀不同之外,其餘均與圖2所示保護膜形成用複合片1B相同。即,保護膜形成用複合片1C係包括基材11,在基材11上包括黏著劑層12,更在黏著劑層12上設有保護膜形成用薄膜23。支撐片10係基材11與黏著劑層12的積層體,保護膜形成用複合片1C,換言之係具有在支撐片10的第1面(臨保護膜形成用薄膜23側的面)10a上,積層著保護膜形成用薄膜23的構成。又,保護膜形成用複合片1C係更進一步在保護膜形成用薄膜23上包括剝離薄膜15。Fig. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film and a support sheet according to yet another embodiment of the present invention. The composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown here is the same as the composite sheet 1B for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 2 except that the shape of the film for forming a protective film is different. That is, 1 C of composite sheets for protective film formation include the base material 11, the adhesive agent layer 12 is included on the base material 11, and the film 23 for protective film formation is provided on the adhesive agent layer 12 further. The support sheet 10 is a laminate of the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12, and the protective film forming composite sheet 1C, in other words, is provided on the first surface (the surface facing the protective film forming film 23 side) 10a of the support sheet 10, The film 23 for forming a protective film is laminated. Moreover, 1 C of composite sheets for protective film formation further include the peeling film 15 on the film 23 for protective film formation.

保護膜形成用複合片1C中,在基材11的第1面11a積層著黏著劑層12,並在黏著劑層12的第1面12a其中一部分(即,中央區域)積層著保護膜形成用薄膜23。而且,在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域、與保護膜形成用薄膜23未接觸到黏著劑層12之一面23a(上面與側面)上,積層著剝離薄膜15。 另外,圖3中,元件符號23b係表示保護膜形成用薄膜23臨黏著劑層12側的面(本說明書中亦稱「第2面」)。In the protective film forming composite sheet 1C, the adhesive layer 12 is laminated on the first surface 11a of the base material 11, and the protective film forming layer is laminated on a part (that is, the central region) of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12. film23. In addition, on the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12, the area where the protective film forming film 23 is not laminated and the surface 23a (the upper surface and the side surface) of the protective film forming film 23 that is not in contact with the adhesive layer 12 are laminated. Peel off the film 15. In addition, in FIG. 3, element code|symbol 23b has shown the surface (also called "2nd surface" in this specification) of the film 23 for protective film formation which faces the adhesive agent layer 12 side.

當從上方朝下俯視保護膜形成用複合片1C時,保護膜形成用薄膜23的表面積較小於黏著劑層12的表面積,且具有例如圓形狀等形狀。When the protective film forming composite sheet 1C is planarly viewed from above, the protective film forming film 23 has a smaller surface area than the adhesive layer 12 and has, for example, a circular shape.

保護膜形成用複合片1C中,亦是基材11的第1面11a呈凹凸面。 再者,黏著劑層12係設計呈直接接觸到基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a狀態。所以,黏著劑層12臨基材11側的面(第2面)12b係凹凸面。 保護膜形成用複合片1C中,亦是基材11的第2面11b(換言之,支撐片10的第2面10b)係可為凹凸面或平滑面(非凹凸面)中之任一者,但以平滑面為佳。Also in 1 C of composite sheets for protective film formation, the 1st surface 11a of the base material 11 is an uneven|corrugated surface. Furthermore, the adhesive layer 12 is designed to be in a state of directly contacting the first surface (concave-convex surface) 11 a of the substrate 11 . Therefore, the surface (second surface) 12b of the adhesive layer 12 on the side facing the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. In the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film, the second surface 11b of the substrate 11 (in other words, the second surface 10b of the support sheet 10) may be either a concave-convex surface or a smooth surface (non-concave-convex surface), But the smooth side is better.

圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C係在已去除剝離薄膜15狀態下,於保護膜形成用薄膜23之面23a貼附半導體晶圓(未圖示)的背面,更在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域處,貼附環形框架等夾具而使用。The composite sheet 1C for protective film formation shown in FIG. In the first surface 12a of the first surface 12a, the area where the film 23 for forming a protective film is not laminated is used by affixing a jig such as a ring frame.

另外,圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片1C,亦可在黏著劑層12的第1面12a中未積層保護膜形成用薄膜23的區域處,同圖1所示積層著夾具用接著劑層(未圖示)。此種包括夾具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片1C,係與圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片同樣,在夾具用接著劑層的上面貼附著環形框架等夾具而使用。In addition, in the composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 3 , an adhesive for a jig as shown in FIG. layers (not shown). Such a composite sheet 1C for forming a protective film including an adhesive layer for a jig is used by affixing a jig such as a ring frame on the adhesive layer for a jig, similarly to the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIG. 1 .

依此,保護膜形成用複合片係不管支撐片及保護膜形成用薄膜採何種形態,均可包括夾具用接著劑層。但,通常如圖1所示,包括夾具用接著劑層的保護膜形成用複合片,以在保護膜形成用薄膜上設有夾具用接著劑層為佳。Accordingly, the composite sheet for protective film formation may include the adhesive layer for jigs regardless of the form of the support sheet and the thin film for protective film formation. However, generally, as shown in FIG. 1 , in the protective film-forming composite sheet including the jig adhesive layer, it is preferable to provide the jig adhesive layer on the protective film-forming film.

本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片並不僅侷限於圖1~圖3所示,在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可變更或刪除圖1~圖3所示的其中一部分構成,亦可在截至目前所說明的構成中更進一步追加其他構成等等。The composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 , and part of them shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 may be changed or deleted within the scope not to impair the effects of the present invention. configuration, and other configurations may be further added to the configurations described so far.

例如圖1~圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片中,亦可在基材11與黏著劑層12之間設置中間層。即,本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,支撐片亦可依照基材、中間層及黏著劑層的順序,在其厚度方向上積層構成。中間層係可配合目的任意選擇。 再者,圖1~圖3所示保護膜形成用複合片亦可在任意地方設置上述中間層以外的層。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片中,亦可在剝離薄膜、與此剝離薄膜直接接觸的層之間,局部產生間隙。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片的各層大小、形狀等,係可配合目的任意調整。For example, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 , an intermediate layer may be provided between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 . That is, in the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention, a support sheet may be laminated|stacked and comprised in the thickness direction in order of a base material, an intermediate|middle layer, and an adhesive agent layer. The intermediate layer system can be selected arbitrarily according to the purpose. In addition, the composite sheet for protective film formation shown in FIGS. 1-3 may provide layers other than the said intermediate layer in arbitrary places. In addition, in the composite sheet for protective film formation, gaps may be partially generated between the release film and the layers directly in contact with the release film. In addition, the size, shape, etc. of each layer of the composite sheet for protective film formation can be adjusted arbitrarily according to the purpose.

但,如圖1~圖3所示,保護膜形成用複合片中,較好係黏著劑層直接接觸於基材的凹凸面(第1面),換言之,在基材與黏著劑層之間並未設置中間層,而是在基材上直接接觸而積層著黏著劑層。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片中,較好係保護膜形成用薄膜直接接觸於黏著劑層的第1面,換言之,在黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜之間並沒有設置其他層,而是在黏著劑層上直接接觸而積層著保護膜形成用薄膜。 再者,保護膜形成用複合片,更佳係這些條件均能滿足,即依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序,在其厚度方向上相互直接接觸、積層而構成。However, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the adhesive layer is in direct contact with the concave-convex surface (first surface) of the base material, in other words, between the base material and the adhesive layer. An intermediate layer is not provided, but an adhesive layer is laminated in direct contact with the substrate. Furthermore, in the composite sheet for forming a protective film, it is preferable that the film for forming a protective film is directly in contact with the first surface of the adhesive layer, in other words, no other layer is provided between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film. Instead, a film for forming a protective film is laminated in direct contact with the adhesive layer. Furthermore, it is more preferable that the composite sheet for forming a protective film satisfies all of these conditions, that is, the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the thin film for forming a protective film are in direct contact with each other and laminated in the thickness direction in the order of the substrate.

上述支撐片較佳係透明。 支撐片配合目的亦可被著色、亦可蒸鍍有其他層。 例如當保護膜形成用薄膜係能量線硬化性的情況,支撐片以使能量線穿透為佳。The above-mentioned supporting sheet is preferably transparent. The supporting sheet may also be colored or vapor-deposited with other layers according to the purpose. For example, when the thin film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the support sheet allows the energy ray to penetrate.

本說明書中,所謂「能量線」係指電磁波或帶電粒子束中具有能量量子,可舉例如:紫外線、放射線、電子束等。紫外線係可使用例如紫外線源之高壓水銀燈、熔絲燈(fusion lamp)、氙燈、黑光燈(black-light)或LED燈等進行照射。電子束係可照射由電子束加速器等所生成者。 本說明書中,所謂「能量線硬化性」係指藉由能量線的照射而硬化的性質;所謂「非能量線硬化性」係即便照射能量線但仍不會硬化的性質。In this specification, the so-called "energy rays" refer to energy quanta in electromagnetic waves or charged particle beams, such as ultraviolet rays, radiation rays, electron beams, etc. The ultraviolet rays can be irradiated using, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp, a fusion lamp, a xenon lamp, a black-light lamp, or an LED lamp as an ultraviolet source. Electron beams can be irradiated with those generated by an electron beam accelerator or the like. In this specification, "energy ray curability" refers to the property of being cured by irradiation of energy ray, and "non-energy ray curability" refers to the property of not curing even when irradiated with energy ray.

支撐片的波長375nm光穿透率較佳係達30%以上、更佳係達50%以上、特佳係達70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜照射能量線(紫外線)時,便更加提升保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化度。 支撐片的波長375nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光的穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The wavelength 375nm light transmittance of the supporting sheet is preferably above 30%, more preferably above 50%, and especially excellent above 70%. When the above-mentioned light transmittance is in such a range, when energy rays (ultraviolet rays) are irradiated to the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet, the degree of hardening of the film for forming a protective film is further increased. The upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 375 nm of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned light transmittance is preferably below 95%.

支撐片的波長532nm光穿透率較佳係30%以上、更佳係50%以上、特佳係70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在其上刻印時,可更清晰地刻印。 支撐片的波長532nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The wavelength 532nm light transmittance of the support sheet is preferably above 30%, more preferably above 50%, and most preferably above 70%. When the above-mentioned light transmittance is in such a range, marking can be performed more clearly when irradiating laser light to the thin film for protective film formation or a protective film via a support sheet and marking on it. The upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 532 nm of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the light transmittance mentioned above is preferably below 95%.

支撐片的波長1064nm光穿透率較佳係達30%以上、更佳係達50%以上、特佳係達70%以上。藉由上述光的穿透率在此種範圍內,當隔著支撐片對保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜照射雷射光而在其上刻印時,可更清晰地刻印。 支撐片的波長1064nm光之穿透率上限值並無特別的限定。例如上述光的穿透率以在95%以下為佳。The wavelength 1064nm light transmittance of the supporting sheet is preferably above 30%, more preferably above 50%, and especially excellent above 70%. When the above-mentioned light transmittance is in such a range, marking can be performed more clearly when irradiating laser light to the thin film for protective film formation or a protective film via a support sheet and marking on it. The upper limit of the transmittance of light with a wavelength of 1064 nm of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned light transmittance is preferably below 95%.

支撐片的穿透清晰度較佳係達30以上、更佳係達100以上、特佳係達200以上。藉由上述穿透清晰度在此種範圍內,可更加輕易隔著支撐片確認保護膜形成用薄膜的浮起脫落、刻印不良情況、及缺損等。 支撐片的穿透清晰度並無特別的限定。例如上述穿透清晰度可在430以下。 支撐片的穿透清晰度係可根據JIS K 7374-2007進行測定。The penetration clarity of the support sheet is preferably above 30, more preferably above 100, and especially excellent above 200. When the above-mentioned penetration clarity is within such a range, it is possible to more easily confirm the floating and falling off of the film for forming a protective film, marking defects, and chipping through the support sheet. The penetration clarity of the support sheet is not particularly limited. For example, the above-mentioned penetration clarity can be below 430. The penetration clarity of the support sheet can be measured in accordance with JIS K 7374-2007.

其次,針對構成支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片的各層進行詳細說明。Next, each layer which comprises a support sheet and the composite sheet for protective film formation is demonstrated in detail.

○基材 上述基材係片狀或薄膜狀,且具有凹凸面。○Substrate The aforementioned substrate is in the form of a sheet or a film, and has a concave-convex surface.

本說明書中,所謂「凹凸面」係指根據JIS B 0601:2013所規定的最大高度粗糙度Rz達0.01μm以上之面。 再者,所謂「平滑面」係指非為凹凸面,而是高平滑度的面,亦稱「非凹凸面」或「亮澤面」。例如平滑面包含具有不屬於上述凹凸面程度的極小凹凸度之面。In this specification, the "uneven surface" refers to a surface with a maximum height roughness Rz of 0.01 μm or more specified in JIS B 0601:2013. Furthermore, the so-called "smooth surface" refers to a surface that is not concave-convex, but highly smooth, and is also called "non-concave-convex surface" or "shiny surface". For example, a smooth surface includes a surface having extremely small unevenness that does not belong to the level of the above-mentioned uneven surface.

基材係可僅其中一面為凹凸面,亦可雙面均為凹凸面,以僅其中一面為凹凸面為佳。換言之,上述基材中,以僅其中一面為平滑面為佳。支撐片中,基材的凹凸面成為設置黏著劑層之一面。The base material may have a concave-convex surface only on one side, or both sides may have a concave-convex surface, preferably only one side has a concave-convex surface. In other words, among the above-mentioned substrates, only one side thereof is preferably smooth. In the support sheet, the concave-convex surface of the base material becomes the surface on which the adhesive layer is provided.

基材係可僅由1層(單層)構成,亦可由2層以上的複數層構成,當由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同,這些複數層的組合並無特別的限定。 當基材係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層中,最外層之一面(最靠近黏著劑層之一面、或最靠近黏著劑層之一面與最遠離之一面的雙面)係成為上述凹凸面。The substrate may be composed of only one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers. When composed of multiple layers, these multiple layers may be the same or different from each other. The combination is not particularly limited. When the base material is composed of multiple layers, among these multiple layers, one of the outermost surfaces (the surface closest to the adhesive layer, or both sides of the surface closest to the adhesive layer and the surface farthest from the adhesive layer) becomes the above-mentioned concavities and convexities. noodle.

本說明書不僅侷限於基材的情況,所謂「複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同」係指「所有層可為相同、亦可所有層均不同、亦可僅其中一部分的層相同」;又,所謂「複數層相互不同」係指「各層的構成材料與厚度中之至少其中一者係相互不同」。This description is not limited to the case of the base material. The so-called "a plurality of layers may be the same or different from each other" means "all the layers may be the same, or all the layers may be different, or only some of the layers may be the same." ; Also, the so-called "a plurality of layers are different from each other" means "at least one of the constituent materials and thicknesses of each layer is different from each other."

基材設有黏著劑層之一側的凹凸面(第1面) 中,根據JIS B 0601:2013所測定的最大高度粗糙度(Rz),較佳係0.01~10μm、更佳係0.1~9μm、特佳係0.5~8.5μm。藉由基材的上述Rz達上述下限值以上,抑制單獨將基材捲取為捲筒狀、解捲時發生不良情況。又,在支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的製造過程中,關於含基材的積層物亦同樣地抑制捲取、解捲時發生不良情況。另一方面,藉由基材的上述Rz在上述上限值以下,便可使黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜的積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更良好。 另外,本說明書中所謂「積層性」,在無特別聲明前提下,係指成為對象的2層的積層狀態的正常度。所謂「積層性良好」係指例如成為對象的相鄰2層間,完全沒有未貼合的區域(空隙部),或未貼合區域的數量少且未貼合區域的層間距離小。The maximum height roughness (Rz) measured in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013 on the concave-convex surface (first surface) on the side where the adhesive layer is provided on the base material is preferably 0.01~10μm, more preferably 0.1~9μm , The best is 0.5~8.5μm. When the said Rz of a base material is more than the said lower limit value, it suppresses that troubles arise when winding up a base material independently into a roll shape, and unwinding. Moreover, in the manufacturing process of the support sheet or the composite sheet for protective film formation, it suppresses that troubles at the time of winding up and unwinding are similarly suppressed about the laminate containing a base material. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned Rz of the base material is not more than the above-mentioned upper limit, the laminarity of the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the marking inspection of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet can be improved. Sex is better. In addition, the term "lamination property" in this specification refers to the normality of the lamination state of the target two layers unless otherwise stated. "Good laminarity" means, for example, that there is no unbonded area (void) between two adjacent layers, or that the number of unbonded areas is small and the interlayer distance between unbonded areas is small.

當基材的雙面均為凹凸面的情況,此雙面的凹凸度係相互可為相同、亦可為不同。When both surfaces of the substrate are concave-convex, the concave-convex degrees of the two surfaces may be the same or different from each other.

上述基材的構成材料係可舉例如各種樹脂。 上述樹脂係可舉例如:低密度聚乙烯(LDPE)、直鏈低密度聚乙烯(LLDPE)、高密度聚乙烯(HDPE)等聚乙烯;聚丙烯、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚甲基戊烯、降莰烯樹脂等聚乙烯以外的聚烯烴;乙烯-醋酸乙烯酯共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸共聚物、乙烯-(甲基)丙烯酸酯共聚物、乙烯-降莰烯共聚物等乙烯系共聚物(單體係使用乙烯所獲得的共聚物);聚氯乙烯、氯乙烯共聚物等氯乙烯系樹脂(單體係使用氯乙烯所獲得的樹脂);聚苯乙烯;聚環烯烴;聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚萘二甲酸乙二酯、聚對苯二甲酸丁二酯、聚間苯二甲酸乙二酯、聚2,6-萘二羧酸乙二酯、所有構成單元均具有芳香族環式基的全芳香族聚酯等聚酯;上述聚酯2種以上的共聚物;聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚氨酯;聚氨酯丙烯酸酯;聚醯亞胺;聚醯胺;聚碳酸酯;氟樹脂;聚縮醛;改質聚伸苯醚;聚苯硫醚;聚碸;聚醚酮等。 再者,上述樹脂亦可舉例如由上述聚酯與其外的樹脂的混合物等聚合物摻合物(polymer alloy)。上述聚酯與其外的樹脂的聚合物摻合物,較佳係聚酯以外的樹脂量屬於較少量。 再者,上述樹脂亦可舉例如:由截至目前為止所例示上述樹脂中之1種或2種以上交聯後的交聯樹脂;使用截至目前為止所例示上述樹脂中之1種或2種以上的離子聚合物等改質樹脂。Various resins can be mentioned as a constituent material of the above-mentioned base material, for example. The above-mentioned resin system can be exemplified: polyethylene such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE); polypropylene, polybutene, polybutadiene, polyformaldehyde Polyolefins other than polyethylene such as pentene and norbornene resins; ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylic acid copolymer, ethylene-(meth)acrylate copolymer, ethylene-norcamphene Ethylene-based copolymers such as copolymers (copolymers obtained by using ethylene in a single system); vinyl chloride resins such as polyvinyl chloride and vinyl chloride copolymers (resins obtained by using vinyl chloride in a single system); polystyrene; Polycycloolefin; polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polyethylene isophthalate, polyethylene 2,6-naphthalate Esters, polyesters such as wholly aromatic polyesters with aromatic ring groups in all their constituent units; copolymers of two or more of the above-mentioned polyesters; poly(meth)acrylates; polyurethanes; polyurethane acrylates; polyimides ; Polyamide; Polycarbonate; Fluorine resin; Polyacetal; Furthermore, the above-mentioned resin can also be, for example, a polymer alloy such as a mixture of the above-mentioned polyester and other resins. For the above-mentioned polymer blend of polyester and other resins, preferably, the amount of resins other than polyester is relatively small. Furthermore, the above-mentioned resin may also be, for example: a cross-linked resin obtained by cross-linking one or two or more of the above-mentioned resins exemplified so far; Modified resins such as ionic polymers.

本說明書中,所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸」係包含「丙烯酸」與「甲基丙烯酸」雙方的概念。關於(甲基)丙烯酸的類似用詞亦同,例如所謂「(甲基)丙烯醯基」係包含「丙烯醯基」與「甲基丙烯醯基」雙方的概念;所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」係包含「丙烯酸酯」與「甲基丙烯酸酯」雙方的概念。In this specification, "(meth)acrylic acid" is a concept including both "acrylic acid" and "methacrylic acid". The same is true for similar terms about (meth)acrylic acid. For example, the so-called "(meth)acryl" includes the concepts of both "acryl" and "methacryl"; the so-called "(meth)acryl" "Ester" is a concept that includes both "acrylate" and "methacrylate".

構成基材的樹脂係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The resin system constituting the base material may be only one type, or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

基材的厚度較佳係在50~300μm範圍內、更佳係在60~150μm範圍內。藉由基材的厚度在此種範圍內,便可更加提升上述保護膜形成用複合片的可撓性、對半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的貼附性。 如上述,因為基材具有凹凸面,因而其厚度係依照基材的部位會有變動。所以,基材厚度的最小值可達上述下限值以上,且基材厚度的最大值可在上述上限值以下。 另外,所謂「基材厚度」係指基材全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的基材厚度,係指構成基材的所有層之合計厚度。The thickness of the substrate is preferably within the range of 50-300 μm, more preferably within the range of 60-150 μm. When the thickness of a base material exists in such a range, the flexibility of the said composite sheet for protective film formation, and the adhesiveness to a semiconductor wafer or a semiconductor wafer can be improved more. As mentioned above, since the substrate has a concave-convex surface, its thickness varies depending on the location of the substrate. Therefore, the minimum value of the thickness of the base material can be more than the above-mentioned lower limit value, and the maximum value of the base material thickness can be below the above-mentioned upper limit value. In addition, the "substrate thickness" refers to the thickness of the entire substrate, for example, the thickness of a substrate composed of a plurality of layers refers to the total thickness of all layers constituting the substrate.

基材的厚度係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察基材的側面或截面便可測定。 基材的截面係例如依照與上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片截面情況之同樣方法便可形成。The thickness of the substrate can be measured by observing the side or cross section of the substrate, for example, using a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross-section of the substrate can be formed, for example, in the same manner as the cross-section of the test piece of the support sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film described above.

例如依照先前所說明方法,從支撐片或保護膜形成用複合片的複數個地方(例如5個地方)切取試驗片,針對此試驗片求取基材厚度的最小值與最大值,再從這些數值進一步求取這些最小值平均值與最大值平均值時,上述最小值平均值可在上述基材厚度的下限值以上,上述最大值平均值亦可在上述基材厚度的上限值以下。For example, according to the method described above, a test piece is cut from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of the composite sheet for forming a support sheet or a protective film, and the minimum value and the maximum value of the thickness of the base material are obtained for the test piece, and then obtained from these When the values are further calculated for these minimum and maximum values, the above-mentioned minimum value average can be above the lower limit of the above-mentioned base material thickness, and the above-mentioned maximum value average can also be below the above-mentioned upper limit of the above-mentioned base material thickness. .

基材係除上述樹脂等主要的構成材料之外,亦可含有例如:填充材、著色劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、有機滑劑、觸媒、軟化劑(可塑劑)等公知各種添加劑。In addition to the main constituent materials such as the above-mentioned resin, the base material may also contain various known additives such as fillers, colorants, antistatic agents, antioxidants, organic lubricants, catalysts, and softeners (plasticizers).

基材較佳係透明。 基材係配合目的可被著色、亦可蒸鍍其他的層。 例如保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性的情況,基材以使能量線穿透為佳。The base material is preferably transparent. The base material can be colored according to the purpose, and other layers can also be vapor-deposited. For example, when the thin film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, it is preferable that the base material is permeable to energy ray.

基材係為了提升與在其上面所設置的黏著劑層等直接接觸的層之密接性,亦可對表面施行例如:電暈放電處理、電子束照射處理、電漿處理、臭氧・紫外線照射處理、火焰處理、鉻酸處理、熱風處理等氧化處理等等。 再者,基材的表面亦可施行底漆處理。 再者,基材係可具有:抗靜電塗層;在重疊保護膜形成用複合片並保存時,可具有防止基材接著於其他片材、基材接著於吸附平台等的層等。In order to improve the adhesiveness of the substrate in direct contact with the adhesive layer placed on it, the surface can also be subjected to corona discharge treatment, electron beam irradiation treatment, plasma treatment, ozone and ultraviolet irradiation treatment. , Flame treatment, chromic acid treatment, hot air treatment and other oxidation treatments, etc. Furthermore, the surface of the substrate can also be treated with a primer. Furthermore, the base material may have: an antistatic coating layer; and a layer that prevents the base material from sticking to other sheets, the base material from sticking to an adsorption platform, etc. when the composite sheet for forming a protective film is stacked and stored.

基材係可利用公知方法製造。例如含有樹脂的基材係藉由將含有上述樹脂的樹脂組成物施行成形便可製造。The base material can be produced by a known method. For example, a base material containing a resin can be produced by molding a resin composition containing the above-mentioned resin.

當使用未具凹凸面的基材(換言之,雙面均為平滑面的基材)時,只要對基材的平滑面施行凹凸化處理便可。 凹凸化處理係可依照公知方法實施。例如使用具凹凸面的金屬輥或金屬板,藉由將其上述的凹凸面按壓於基材的平滑面,便可對基材的平滑面施行凹凸化處理。此時,以將經加熱狀態的金屬輥或金屬板按壓於基材的平滑面為佳。又,基材的平滑面亦可利用噴砂處理、或溶劑處理等施行凹凸化處理。When using a base material that does not have a rough surface (in other words, a base material whose both sides are smooth), it is only necessary to perform a roughening treatment on the smooth surface of the base material. The roughening treatment can be performed according to a known method. For example, by using a metal roll or a metal plate having a concave-convex surface and pressing the above-mentioned concave-convex surface against the smooth surface of the substrate, the smooth surface of the substrate can be subjected to the concave-convex treatment. At this time, it is preferable to press the heated metal roll or metal plate against the smooth surface of the base material. In addition, the smooth surface of the base material may be roughened by sandblasting, solvent treatment, or the like.

○黏著劑層 上述黏著劑層係片狀或薄膜狀。 黏著劑層中,通常無論在基材與黏著劑層間有無設置中間層,均會受基材的上述凹凸面影響,導致至少臨基材側的面會成為凹凸面。○Adhesive layer The above-mentioned adhesive layer is in the form of a sheet or a film. In the adhesive layer, whether there is an intermediate layer between the substrate and the adhesive layer or not, it will be affected by the above-mentioned uneven surface of the substrate, so that at least the surface facing the substrate will become an uneven surface.

黏著劑層係可由1層(單層)構成,亦可由2層以上的複數層構成,當由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同,且這些複數層的組合並無特別的限定。 當黏著劑層係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層中的最外層之一面(最接近基材之一面)將成為上述凹凸面。The adhesive layer system may be composed of one layer (single layer), or may be composed of multiple layers of two or more layers, and when composed of multiple layers, these multiple layers may be the same or different from each other, and The combination is not particularly limited. When the adhesive layer is composed of a plurality of layers, one of the outermost surfaces of the plurality of layers (the surface closest to the substrate) will become the above-mentioned concave-convex surface.

此處,參照圖式,針對基材與黏著劑層進行更詳細說明。 圖4所示係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片之示意放大剖視圖。在此,舉圖1所示保護膜形成用複合片1A為例進行說明。另外,圖4中省略圖示剝離薄膜。Here, referring to the drawings, the base material and the adhesive layer will be described in more detail. Fig. 4 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Here, the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example and demonstrated. In addition, illustration of the release film is omitted in FIG. 4 .

如前所說明,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。而,黏著劑層12係設置成直接接觸於基材11的第1面(凹凸面)11a,黏著劑層12的第2面12b可輕易追隨基材11的第1面11a。所以,黏著劑層12的第2面12b亦呈凹凸面。As described above, the first surface 11a of the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. However, the adhesive layer 12 is provided in direct contact with the first surface (concave-convex surface) 11 a of the substrate 11 , and the second surface 12 b of the adhesive layer 12 can easily follow the first surface 11 a of the substrate 11 . Therefore, the second surface 12b of the adhesive layer 12 is also a concave-convex surface.

黏著劑層12的厚度Ta 並非固定,依照黏著劑層12的部位會有變動。此處,黏著劑層12的厚度最小值以符號Ta1 表示,黏著劑層12的厚度最大值以符號Ta2 表示。The thickness T a of the adhesive layer 12 is not constant, and varies according to the location of the adhesive layer 12 . Here, the minimum thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by symbol T a1 , and the maximum thickness of the adhesive layer 12 is represented by symbol T a2 .

保護膜形成用複合片1A中,從其5個地方切取試驗片,在這5片試驗片形成截面,並就此新形成的截面分別求取黏著劑層的厚度最小值Ta1 與最大值Ta2 。然後,從至少5個Ta1 值求取其平均值(上述S值),且從至少5個Ta2 值求取其平均值(上述L值),計算出上述L值相對於上述S值的比率(L值/S值),結果為1.2以上且未滿5.0。In the protective film forming composite sheet 1A, test pieces are cut out from 5 places, and cross sections are formed on these 5 test pieces, and the minimum value T a1 and maximum value T a2 of the thickness of the adhesive layer are respectively obtained for the newly formed cross sections. . Then, the average value (the above-mentioned S value) is obtained from at least five T a1 values, and the average value (the above-mentioned L value) is obtained from at least five T a2 values, and the ratio of the above-mentioned L value to the above-mentioned S value is calculated. The ratio (L value/S value) was 1.2 or more and less than 5.0.

從保護膜形成用複合片1A切取試驗片、試驗片的截面形成、上述截面的黏著劑層厚度最小值Ta1 與最大值Ta2 測定,係如前所說明,可依照與從尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片切取試驗片之情況同樣地實行。Cut the test piece from the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation, form the cross-section of the test piece, and measure the minimum value T a1 and maximum value T a2 of the thickness of the adhesive layer in the above-mentioned cross-section. The same was done in the case of cutting out the test piece from the support sheet for forming the composite sheet.

另外,尚未構成保護膜形成用複合片的支撐片之放大剖視圖,係與圖4中省略圖示保護膜形成用薄膜13的情況相同。In addition, the enlarged cross-sectional view of the support sheet which has not yet constituted the composite sheet for forming a protective film is the same as the case where the film 13 for forming a protective film is omitted in FIG. 4 .

作為保護膜形成用複合片1A,此處顯示在基材11與黏著劑層12之間,存在有其未貼合的區域(本說明書中亦稱「未貼合區域」)91。但,即便保護膜形成用複合片1A具有此種未貼合區域91,在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向的未貼合區域91大小例如為0.5μm以下的保護膜形成用複合片1A,其基材11與黏著劑層12間之積層性仍良好,可謂具有良好特性。As the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation, it is shown here that between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 , there is an unbonded region (also referred to as "unbonded region" in this specification) 91 . However, even if the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film has such an unbonded region 91 , the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film whose size of the non-bonded region 91 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film is, for example, 0.5 μm or less, The lamination property between the base material 11 and the adhesive layer 12 is still good, which can be said to have good characteristics.

另外,本說明書中,所謂「在保護膜形成用複合片厚度方向的未貼合區域大小」,係指「保護膜形成用複合片中,相鄰2層在上述片的厚度方向之層間距離」,有時簡稱「層間距離」。例如上述「在保護膜形成用複合片1A的厚度方向之未貼合區域91大小」,係指「在上述片1A的厚度方向之基材11與黏著劑層12間的層間距離」。 當1個地方的未貼合區域大小(層間距離)有變動時,便將最大值採用為未貼合區域的大小(層間距離)。In addition, in this specification, "the size of the unbonded area in the thickness direction of the composite sheet for protective film formation" means "the distance between two adjacent layers in the thickness direction of the sheet for protective film formation in the composite sheet for protective film formation." , sometimes simply referred to as "interlayer distance". For example, the "size of the unbonded region 91 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A" refers to "the interlayer distance between the substrate 11 and the adhesive layer 12 in the thickness direction of the sheet 1A." When the size of the unbonded area (distance between layers) varies in one place, the maximum value is adopted as the size of the unbonded area (distance between layers).

未貼合區域的大小(層間距離)係可依照與例如上述黏著劑層厚度的情況同樣方法進行測定。即,依照與求取黏著劑層厚度時的相同方法,在保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片中形成截面,再在此截面便可求取未貼合區域的大小。或者,亦可在未製作試驗片情況下,以保護膜形成用複合片自體形成截面,再在此截面求取未貼合區域的大小。The size (distance between layers) of the unbonded area can be measured by the same method as, for example, the thickness of the above-mentioned adhesive layer. That is, in the same way as when calculating the thickness of the adhesive layer, a cross section is formed in the test piece of the composite sheet for forming a protective film, and then the size of the unbonded area can be obtained from this cross section. Alternatively, without producing a test piece, a cross-section can be formed on the protective film forming composite sheet itself, and then the size of the unbonded area can be obtained from this cross-section.

未貼合區域91的大小(上述層間距離)係例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下中之任一者。The size of the unbonded region 91 (the interlayer distance) may be, for example, any one of 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, 0.2 μm or less, and 0.1 μm or less.

保護膜形成用複合片1A亦有完全沒有存在未貼合區域91的情形。The composite sheet 1A for protective film formation may not exist the non-bonding area|region 91 at all.

此處舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例,針對基材與黏著劑層進行說明,但關於保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等之其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況,亦是同樣的基材與黏著劑層。Here, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1A is taken as an example, and the base material and the adhesive layer are described. However, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1B, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1C, and other embodiments of the composite sheet for forming a protective film are described. In the case of the composite sheet, the base material and the adhesive layer are also the same.

黏著劑層L值相對於黏著劑層S值的比率(L值/S值)係在1.2以上且未滿5.0前提下,並無特別的限定。 上述L值/S值較佳係1.3以上、更佳係1.4以上,例如可為1.8以上、2.3以上及2.7以上中之任一者。藉由上述L值/S值達上述下限值以上,則黏著劑層可充分追隨基材的凹凸,在基材層與黏著劑層間不會發生剝離情形,基材層與黏著劑層間之密接性更良好。The ratio of the L value of the adhesive layer to the S value of the adhesive layer (L value/S value) is not particularly limited on the premise that it is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0. The above-mentioned L value/S value is preferably 1.3 or more, more preferably 1.4 or more, for example, may be any one of 1.8 or more, 2.3 or more, and 2.7 or more. When the above-mentioned L value/S value exceeds the above-mentioned lower limit value, the adhesive layer can fully follow the unevenness of the base material, no peeling will occur between the base material layer and the adhesive layer, and the tight adhesion between the base material layer and the adhesive layer Sex is better.

上述L值/S值較佳係4.3以下、更佳係3.7以下、特佳係3.1以下,例如亦可在2.8以下。藉由上述L值/S值在上述上限值以下,便使保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性更良好。The above-mentioned L value/S value is preferably at most 4.3, more preferably at most 3.7, most preferably at most 3.1, for example, may be at most 2.8. When the said L value/S value is below the said upper limit, the marking visibility of a protective film or a film for protective film formation via a support sheet becomes more favorable.

上述L值/S值係可在上述較佳下限值與上限值任意組合設定的範圍內適當調整。例如上述L值/S值較佳係1.2~4.3、更佳係1.3~3.7、特佳係1.4~3.1。但,這些僅為上述L值/S值之一例而已。The above-mentioned L value/S value can be appropriately adjusted within the range set by any combination of the above-mentioned preferred lower limit and upper limit. For example, the above-mentioned L value/S value is preferably 1.2~4.3, more preferably 1.3~3.7, and particularly good is 1.4~3.1. However, these are only examples of the above-mentioned L value/S value.

黏著劑層的S值係在設定黏著劑層的L值時,L值相對於S值的比率(L值/S值)係1.2以上且未滿5.0之前提下,並無特別的限定,較佳係1.5μm以上、更佳係1.7μm以上、特佳係1.9μm以上,例如可為3μm以上、4.5μm以上及6μm以上中之任一者。藉由上述S值達1.5μm以上,便輕易使黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性良好。The S value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited on the premise that the ratio of the L value to the S value (L value/S value) is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0 when setting the L value of the adhesive layer. The best is 1.5 μm or more, more preferably 1.7 μm or more, and the most preferred is 1.9 μm or more, for example, it may be any of 3 μm or more, 4.5 μm or more, and 6 μm or more. When the above-mentioned S value is 1.5 μm or more, the laminarity between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film can be easily improved.

另一方面,黏著劑層的S值亦可例如9μm以下。此種黏著劑層係可更輕易形成。On the other hand, the S value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 9 μm or less. Such an adhesive layer can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的S值係可在上述較佳下限值與上限值任意組合設定的範圍內適當調整。例如黏著劑層的S值較佳係1.5~9μm、更佳係1.7~9μm、特佳係1.9~9μm,例如可為3~9μm、4.5~9μm、及6~9μm中之任一者。但,這些僅為黏著劑層的S值一例而已。The S value of the adhesive layer can be properly adjusted within the range set by any combination of the above preferred lower limit and upper limit. For example, the S value of the adhesive layer is preferably 1.5-9 μm, more preferably 1.7-9 μm, and most preferably 1.9-9 μm, for example, any one of 3-9 μm, 4.5-9 μm, and 6-9 μm. However, these are only examples of the S value of the adhesive layer.

黏著劑層的L值係在相對於上述S值的比率(L值/S值)為1.2以上且未滿5.0之前提下,並無特別的限定,較佳係15μm以下、更佳係14.5μm以下,例如可為13μm以下、11μm以下、9μm以下、及7μm以下中之任一者。藉由上述L值在上述上限值以下,便使保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性更良好。The L value of the adhesive layer is not particularly limited as long as the ratio (L value/S value) to the above S value is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0, but it is preferably 15 μm or less, more preferably 14.5 μm Below, for example, any one of 13 μm or less, 11 μm or less, 9 μm or less, and 7 μm or less may be used. When the said L value is below the said upper limit, the marking visibility of a protective film or a film for protective film formation via a support sheet becomes more favorable.

另一方面,黏著劑層的L值亦可例如1.5μm以上。此種黏著劑層係可更輕易形成。On the other hand, the L value of the adhesive layer may be, for example, 1.5 μm or more. Such an adhesive layer can be formed more easily.

黏著劑層的L值係可在上述較佳下限值與上限值任意組合設定的範圍內適當調整。例如黏著劑層的L值較佳係1.5~15μm、更佳係1.5~14.5μm,例如可為1.5~13μm、1.5~11μm、1.5~9μm、及1.5~7中之任一者。The L value of the adhesive layer can be properly adjusted within the range set by any combination of the above preferred lower limit and upper limit. For example, the L value of the adhesive layer is preferably 1.5-15 μm, more preferably 1.5-14.5 μm, for example, any one of 1.5-13 μm, 1.5-11 μm, 1.5-9 μm, and 1.5-7.

黏著劑層的S值與L值之組合,係可依L值相對於S值的比率(L值/S值)滿足上述上限值與下限值的方式任意設定。例如:S值1.5~9μm、L值1.5~15μm的組合;S值1.5~9μm、L值1.5~14.5μm的組合;S值1.7~9μm、L值1.5~15μm的組合;S值1.7~9μm、L值1.5~14.5μm的組合;S值1.9~9μm、L值1.5~15μm的組合;S值1.9~9μm、L值1.5~14.5μm的組合;S值3~9μm、L值1.5~15μm的組合等任一者。The combination of the S value and the L value of the adhesive layer can be set arbitrarily so that the ratio of the L value to the S value (L value/S value) satisfies the above upper limit and lower limit. For example: combination of S value 1.5~9μm and L value 1.5~15μm; combination of S value 1.5~9μm and L value 1.5~14.5μm; combination of S value 1.7~9μm and L value 1.5~15μm; S value 1.7~9μm , combination of L value 1.5~14.5μm; combination of S value 1.9~9μm, L value 1.5~15μm; combination of S value 1.9~9μm, L value 1.5~14.5μm; S value 3~9μm, L value 1.5~15μm The combination of is equal to any one.

黏著劑層厚度(例如Ta )係在滿足上述L值相對於S值的比率條件下,並無特別的限定。 例如黏著劑層厚度亦可為1.5~15μm。The thickness of the adhesive layer (for example, T a ) is not particularly limited as long as the ratio of the above-mentioned L value to the S value is satisfied. For example, the thickness of the adhesive layer may also be 1.5-15 μm.

另外,所謂「黏著劑層的厚度」係指黏著劑層全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的黏著劑層的厚度,便指構成黏著劑層的所有層之合計厚度。依照此種觀點規定上述黏著劑層的厚度最小值與最大值。In addition, the "thickness of the adhesive layer" refers to the thickness of the entire adhesive layer, for example, the thickness of an adhesive layer composed of a plurality of layers refers to the total thickness of all the layers constituting the adhesive layer. From this point of view, the minimum and maximum thicknesses of the above-mentioned adhesive layer are specified.

黏著劑層係含有黏著劑。 上述黏著劑係可舉例如:丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等黏著性樹脂,較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。The adhesive layer system contains an adhesive. Examples of the above adhesive system include adhesive resins such as acrylic resins, urethane resins, rubber resins, silicone resins, epoxy resins, polyvinyl ethers, polycarbonates, and ester resins. Acrylic resin is preferred.

本說明書中,所謂「黏著性樹脂」係包含具黏著性樹脂、與具接著性樹脂雙方的概念,例如不僅樹脂自體具有黏著性者,亦包含藉由併用添加劑等其他成分而呈現黏著性的樹脂、藉由熱或水等觸發物(trigger)存在而呈現接著性的樹脂等。In this specification, the term "adhesive resin" is a concept that includes both adhesive resin and adhesive resin. For example, not only the resin itself has adhesiveness, but also the resin exhibits adhesiveness by using other components such as additives in combination. Resins, resins that exhibit adhesiveness due to the presence of triggers such as heat or water, etc.

黏著劑層較佳係呈透明。 黏著劑層亦可配合目的被著色。 例如當保護膜形成用薄膜為能量線硬化性的情況,黏著劑層以使能量線穿透為佳。The adhesive layer is preferably transparent. The adhesive layer can also be colored according to the purpose. For example, when the film for forming a protective film is energy ray curable, it is preferable for the adhesive layer to pass through the energy ray.

黏著劑層亦可使用能量線硬化性黏著劑形成,亦可使用非能量線硬化性黏著劑形成。使用能量線硬化性黏著劑形成的黏著劑層,可輕易調整硬化前與硬化後的物性。The adhesive layer may be formed using an energy ray-curable adhesive or may be formed using a non-energy ray-curable adhesive. The adhesive layer formed by energy ray curable adhesive can easily adjust the physical properties before and after curing.

<<黏著劑組成物>> 黏著劑層可使用含有黏著劑的黏著劑組成物來形成。例如在黏著劑層形成標的面塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,可在目標部位處形成黏著劑層。關於黏著劑層的更具體形成方法,會與其外之層的形成方法一併在後文詳述。黏著劑組成物中常溫下不會氣化之成分間的含有量比率,通常同黏著劑層的上述成分間之含有量比率。<<Adhesive composition>> The adhesive layer can be formed using an adhesive composition containing an adhesive. For example, the adhesive composition can be applied on the surface to be formed with the adhesive layer and dried as necessary to form the adhesive layer at the target site. A more specific method for forming the adhesive layer will be described in detail later together with methods for forming the outer layers. The content ratio of the components that do not vaporize at normal temperature in the adhesive composition is usually the same as the content ratio of the above-mentioned components in the adhesive layer.

本說明書中,所謂「常溫」係指不會特別冷、或特別熱的溫度,即平常的溫度,例如15~25℃的溫度等。In this specification, "normal temperature" refers to a temperature that is not particularly cold or hot, that is, a normal temperature, for example, a temperature of 15 to 25°C.

黏著劑組成物的塗佈係可利用公知方法實行,例如使用氣刀塗佈機(Air-knife-coater)、刮刀塗佈機(Blade-coater)、棒式塗佈機(Bar-coater)、凹版塗佈機(Gravure-coater)、輥式塗佈機(Roll-coater)、輥式刀塗機(Roll-knife-coater)、淋幕塗佈機(Curtain-coater)、模塗機(Die-Coater)、刀塗機(Knife-coater)、網版塗佈機(Screen-coater)、麥勒棒塗機(Meyer-bar-coater)、吻合式塗佈機(Kiss-coater)等各種塗佈機的方法。The coating system of the adhesive composition can be implemented by a known method, for example, using an air knife coater (Air-knife-coater), a blade coater (Blade-coater), a rod coater (Bar-coater), Gravure-coater, Roll-coater, Roll-knife-coater, Curtain-coater, Die coater -Coater), Knife-coater, Screen-coater, Meyer-bar-coater, Kiss-coater, etc. The method of cloth machine.

黏著劑組成物的乾燥條件並無特別的限定,當黏著劑組成物係含有後述溶劑的情況,以施行加熱乾燥為佳。含有溶劑的黏著劑組成物是以以例如70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件施行乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the adhesive composition are not particularly limited, and when the adhesive composition contains the solvent described later, it is preferable to perform heat drying. The solvent-containing adhesive composition is preferably dried at, for example, 70-130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes.

當黏著劑層為能量線硬化性的情況,含有能量線硬化性黏著劑的黏著劑組成物(即,能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物),係可舉例如:含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)(以下簡稱「黏著性樹脂(I-1a)」)、與能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組成物(I-1);含有經在非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈,導入不飽和基的能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)(以下簡稱「黏著性樹脂(I-2a)」)之黏著劑組成物(I-2);含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)、與能量線硬化性化合物的黏著劑組成物(I-3)等。When the adhesive layer is energy ray-curable, the adhesive composition containing the energy ray-curable adhesive (that is, the energy ray-curable adhesive composition) includes, for example, a non-energy ray-curable adhesive Resin (I-1a) (hereinafter referred to as "adhesive resin (I-1a)"), an adhesive composition (I-1) with an energy ray-curable compound; containing a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin ( The side chain of I-1a), the adhesive composition (I-2) of the energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) (hereinafter referred to as "adhesive resin (I-2a)") with unsaturated groups introduced; Adhesive composition (I-3) containing the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a), an energy ray-curable compound, and the like.

<黏著劑組成物(I-1)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)係如上述,含有非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、與能量線硬化性化合物。<Adhesive composition (I-1)> The above adhesive composition (I-1) contains a non-energy ray curable adhesive resin (I-1a) and an energy ray curable compound as described above.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。 上述丙烯酸系樹脂係可舉例如至少具有由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生的構成單元的丙烯酸系聚合體。 上述丙烯酸系樹脂所具有的構成單元係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,當2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably an acrylic resin. The above-mentioned acrylic resin is, for example, an acrylic polymer having at least a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. The structural unit system which the said acrylic resin has may be only 1 type, and may be 2 or more types, and when there are 2 or more types, the combination and ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯係可例如構成烷基酯的烷基碳數為1~20者,而上述烷基較佳係直鏈狀或分支鏈狀。 (甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯更具體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十九烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸廿烷基酯等。The above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylate can be, for example, the carbon number of the alkyl constituting the alkyl ester is 1-20, and the above-mentioned alkyl is preferably linear or branched. Alkyl (meth)acrylate can be more systematic, for example: methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ( n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate , Isononyl (meth)acrylate, Decyl (meth)acrylate, Undecyl (meth)acrylate, Myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), Pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, Cetyl (meth)acrylate (palmityl (meth)acrylate), Heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, Octadecyl (meth)acrylate Base ester (stearyl (meth)acrylate), nonadecyl (meth)acrylate, eicosyl (meth)acrylate, etc.

就從提升黏著劑層的黏著力的觀點,上述丙烯酸系聚合體較佳係具有由上述烷基碳數4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生的構成單元。而,就從更加提升黏著劑層黏著力的觀點,上述烷基的碳數較佳係4~12、更佳係4~8。又,上述烷基碳數達4以上的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯較佳係丙烯酸烷基酯。From the viewpoint of improving the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the acrylic polymer preferably has a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate having 4 or more carbon atoms in the alkyl group. However, from the viewpoint of further enhancing the adhesive force of the adhesive layer, the carbon number of the above-mentioned alkyl group is preferably 4-12, more preferably 4-8. In addition, the above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms is preferably an alkyl acrylate.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,以還具有由含官能基之單體所衍生的構成單元為佳。 上述含官能基單體,可列舉藉由上述官能基與後述交聯劑進行反應而成為交聯起點、藉由上述官能基與後述含不飽和基化合物中的不飽和基進行反應等,便可在丙烯酸系聚合體的側鏈中導入不飽和基者。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer preferably has a constituent unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer in addition to a constituent unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate. The above-mentioned functional group-containing monomer can be exemplified by reacting the above-mentioned functional group with the cross-linking agent described later to become a cross-linking origin, by reacting the above-mentioned functional group with the unsaturated group in the unsaturated group-containing compound described later, etc. One that introduces an unsaturated group into the side chain of an acrylic polymer.

含官能基單體中的上述官能基係可舉例如:羥基、羧基、胺基、環氧基等。 即,含官能基單體係可舉例如:含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。The above-mentioned functional groups in the functional group-containing monomers include, for example, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amino groups, epoxy groups, and the like. That is, the functional group-containing monomer system includes, for example, a hydroxyl-containing monomer, a carboxyl-containing monomer, an amino-containing monomer, an epoxy-containing monomer, and the like.

上述含羥基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥烷基酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(未具(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等。The above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing monomer system can be exemplified: (meth) hydroxymethyl acrylate, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxyethyl, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxypropyl, (meth) acrylate-3 -Hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate and other hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates ; Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols (unsaturated alcohols without a (meth)acryl skeleton) such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol.

上述含羧基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、衣康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸-2-羧乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等等。The above-mentioned carboxyl group-containing monomer system can be exemplified for example: (meth)acrylic acid, crotonic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds); fumaric acid, itaconic acid, cis Butenedioic acid, citraconic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids (dicarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds); anhydrides of the above-mentioned ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyethyl methacrylate, etc. Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and the like.

含官能基單體較佳係含羥基單體、含羧基單體,更佳係含羥基單體。The functional group-containing monomer is preferably a hydroxyl-containing monomer or a carboxyl-containing monomer, more preferably a hydroxyl-containing monomer.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含官能基單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The functional group-containing monomer system constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer may be only one type, or may be two or more types. If there are two or more types, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的含有量,相對於構成單元總量,較佳係1~35質量%、更佳係2~30質量%、特佳係3~27質量%。In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, the content of the structural units derived from the functional group-containing monomer is preferably 1 to 35% by mass, more preferably 2 to 30% by mass, and most preferably 3 ~27% by mass.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元、及由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元之外,尚亦可更進一步具有由其他單體所衍生的構成單元。 上述其他單體係在能與(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等進行共聚之前提下,並無特別的限定。 上述其他單體係可舉例如:苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、乙烯基甲苯、甲酸乙烯酯、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、丙烯醯胺等。In addition to the constituent units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylate and functional group-containing monomers, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer system may further have constituent units derived from other monomers. The other monomers mentioned above are not particularly limited on the premise that they can be copolymerized with alkyl (meth)acrylate or the like. Examples of other monomer systems mentioned above include styrene, α-methylstyrene, vinyl toluene, vinyl formate, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, acrylamide, and the like.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體的上述其他單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned other monomers constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體係可使用為上述非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)。 另一方面,使上述丙烯酸系聚合體中的官能基,與具能量線聚合性不飽和基(能量線聚合性基)的不飽和基含有化合物產生者,可使用上述能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer system can be used as the above-mentioned non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a). On the other hand, the functional group in the above-mentioned acrylic polymer and the unsaturated group-containing compound generator having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group (energy ray polymerizable group) can be used as the above-mentioned energy ray-curable adhesive resin. (I-2a).

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的含有量較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, more preferably 10 to 95% by mass, and most preferably 15 to 90% by mass.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可舉例如具有能量線聚合性不飽和基,利用能量線照射便可硬化的單體或寡聚物。 能量線硬化性化合物中,單體係可舉例如:三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇六[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,4-丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多元(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。 能量線硬化性化合物中,寡聚物可列舉由上述所例示單體進行聚合而成的寡聚物等。 能量線硬化性化合物係就從分子量較大、不易使黏著劑層之儲存彈性模數降低的觀點,較佳係胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯、胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物。[Energy Beam Curing Compound] The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) is, for example, a monomer or oligomer having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group and curable by energy ray irradiation. Among the energy ray-curing compounds, monomer systems include, for example, trimethylolpropane tris[(meth)acrylate], neopentylthritol (meth)acrylate, neopentylthritol tetra[(meth)acrylate] Acrylate], Dineopentyl Glycol Hexa[(meth)acrylate], 1,4-Butanediol Di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-Hexanediol (meth)acrylate, etc. Multi-component (meth)acrylate; urethane (meth)acrylate; polyester (meth)acrylate; polyether (meth)acrylate; epoxy (meth)acrylate, etc. Among the energy ray-curable compounds, the oligomers include oligomers obtained by polymerizing the monomers listed above, and the like. The energy ray-curable compound is preferably urethane (meth)acrylate or urethane (meth)acrylate from the viewpoint of having a large molecular weight and not easily lowering the storage elastic modulus of the adhesive layer. oligomers.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned energy ray-curing compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,上述能量線硬化性化合物的含有量較佳係1~95質量%、更佳係5~90質量%、特佳係10~85質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 5 to 90% by mass, and most preferably 10 to 85% by mass.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,更進一步使用具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-1)較佳係更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the adhesive resin (I-1a) is derived from a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, when the above-mentioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is further used, the adhesive composition The substance (I-1) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

上述交聯劑係例如與上述官能基產生反應,而使黏著性樹脂(I-1a)彼此間進行交聯者。 交聯劑係可舉例如:二異氰酸甲苯酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯、這些二異氰酸酯的加成體等異氰酸酯系交聯劑(具異氰酸酯基之交聯劑);乙二醇環氧丙醚等環氧系交聯劑(具環氧丙基之交聯劑);六[1-(2-甲基)-吖丙啶基]三磷酸三嗪等氮丙啶系交聯劑(具吖丙啶基之交聯劑);鋁螯合等金屬螯合系交聯劑(具金屬螯合構造之交聯劑);異三聚氰酸酯系交聯劑(具異三聚氰酸骨架之交聯劑)等。 就從提升黏著劑凝聚力,俾提升黏著劑層黏著力的觀點,以及可輕易取得等觀點,交聯劑較佳係異氰酸酯系交聯劑。The said crosslinking agent is what reacts with the said functional group, and crosslinks adhesive resin (I-1a) mutually, for example. The cross-linking agent system can be, for example, isocyanate-based cross-linking agents (with isocyanate groups) such as toluene diisocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, xylylene diisocyanate, and adducts of these diisocyanates. cross-linking agent); epoxy-based cross-linking agents such as ethylene glycol glycidyl ether (cross-linking agent with glycidyl group); hexa[1-(2-methyl)-aziridinyl] triphosphate triphosphate Aziridine-based cross-linking agents such as oxazine (cross-linking agent with aziridine group); metal chelating cross-linking agent such as aluminum chelate (cross-linking agent with metal chelating structure); isocyanurate It is a crosslinking agent (crosslinking agent with isocyanuric acid skeleton), etc. From the viewpoints of improving the cohesion of the adhesive to enhance the adhesion of the adhesive layer, as well as being easy to obtain, the cross-linking agent is preferably an isocyanate-based cross-linking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The cross-linking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,交聯劑的含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.1~20質量份、特佳係0.3~15質量份。In the above adhesive composition (I-1), the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). Parts by mass, especially 0.3-15 parts by mass.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-1)即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-1) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-1) containing a photopolymerization initiator fully advances hardening reaction even if it irradiates energy rays of low energy, such as an ultraviolet-ray.

上述光聚合起始劑係可舉例如:苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等醯化氧化膦化合物;苄基苯硫醚、單硫化四甲胺硫甲醯等硫醚化合物;1-羥環己基苯酮等α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等二茂鈦化合物;氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
等氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化合物;二乙醯等二酮化合物;苄基;二苄基;二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯甲烷;2-羥-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 再者,上述光聚合起始劑亦可使用例如:1-氯蒽醌等醌化合物;胺等光增感劑等。The above-mentioned photopolymerization initiators can be exemplified as: benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether, benzoin benzoic acid, benzoin benzoin Benzoin compounds such as methyl ester, benzoin dimethyl ketal; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propan-1-one, 2,2-dimethoxy- Acetophenone compounds such as 1,2-diphenylethan-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzene Acylated phosphine oxide compounds such as formyl diphenylphosphine oxide; thioether compounds such as benzyl phenyl sulfide and tetramethylammonium thioformyl monosulfide; α-ketol compounds such as 1-hydroxycyclohexyl phenone; azo Azo compounds such as bisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; oxygen sulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
isosulfur
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; peroxy compounds; diketone compounds such as diacetyl; benzyl; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyloxysulfurium
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone, etc. In addition, the said photoinitiator can also use, for example: a quinone compound, such as 1-chloroanthraquinone; Photosensitizers, such as an amine, etc. can also be used.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中,光聚合起始劑的含有量,相對於上述能量線硬化性化合物含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the energy ray-curable compound. 0.05 to 5 parts by mass, and 0.05 to 5 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑係可舉例如:抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、軟化劑(可塑劑)、填充材(填料)、防銹劑、著色劑(顏料、染料)、增感劑、賦黏劑、反應阻滯劑、交聯促進劑(觸媒)等公知添加劑。 另外,所謂「反應阻滯劑」係抑制例如因在黏著劑組成物(I-1)中混入的觸媒作用,造成保存中的黏著劑組成物(I-1)進行非為目的之交聯反應。反應阻滯劑可列舉例如利用螯合對觸媒形成螯合錯合物者,更具體可列舉1分子中具有2個以上羰基(-C(=O)-)者。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-1) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. The above-mentioned other additives can be for example: antistatic agents, antioxidants, softeners (plasticizers), fillers (fillers), rust inhibitors, colorants (pigments, dyes), sensitizers, tackifiers, reaction inhibitors, etc. Known additives such as retarder, crosslinking accelerator (catalyst). In addition, the so-called "reaction retarder" is to suppress, for example, the unintended cross-linking of the adhesive composition (I-1) during storage due to the catalytic action mixed in the adhesive composition (I-1). reaction. Examples of the reaction retarder include those that form a chelate complex with a chelate catalyst, and more specifically, those that have two or more carbonyl groups (—C(=O)—) in one molecule.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1) is not particularly limited, as long as they are properly selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-1)亦可含有溶劑。黏著劑組成物(I-1)係藉由含有溶劑,而提升對塗佈標的面的塗佈適性。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-1) may also contain a solvent. The adhesive composition (I-1) improves the applicability to the coating target surface by containing a solvent.

上述溶劑較佳係有機溶劑,而上述有機溶劑係可舉例如:甲乙酮、丙酮等酮;醋酸乙酯等酯(羧酸酯);四氫呋喃、二㗁烷等醚;環己烷、正己烷等脂肪族烴;甲苯、二甲苯等芳香族烴;1-丙醇、2-丙醇等醇等等。The above-mentioned solvent is preferably an organic solvent, and the above-mentioned organic solvent can be for example: ketones such as methyl ethyl ketone and acetone; esters (carboxylates) such as ethyl acetate; ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and dioxane; fatty acids such as cyclohexane and n-hexane. Aromatic hydrocarbons; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; alcohols such as 1-propanol and 2-propanol, etc.

上述溶劑係例如可在黏著性樹脂(I-1a)製造時所使用者未從黏著性樹脂(I-1a)去除情況下,直接使用於黏著劑組成物(I-1),亦可在黏著劑組成物(I-1)製造時,另行添加與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)製造時所使用者相同或不同種類的溶劑。For example, the above-mentioned solvent can be directly used in the adhesive composition (I-1) when the adhesive resin (I-1a) is produced without being removed from the adhesive resin (I-1a), or it can be used in the adhesive When the agent composition (I-1) is produced, the same or a different type of solvent as that used for the production of the adhesive resin (I-1a) is additionally added.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-1) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

<黏著劑組成物(I-2)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-2)係如上述,含有在非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的側鏈導入不飽和基後的能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-2a)。<Adhesive composition (I-2)> The above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-2) is an energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-2a) containing an unsaturated group introduced into the side chain of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) as described above. .

[黏著性樹脂(I-2a)] 上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係例如藉由使黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基,與具能量線聚合性不飽和基的含不飽和基化合物進行反應便可獲得。[Adhesive resin (I-2a)] The above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a) can be obtained, for example, by reacting a functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) with an unsaturated group-containing compound having an energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group.

上述含不飽和基化合物係上述能量線聚合性不飽和基之外,更進一步具有藉由與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中的官能基進行反應,便能與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)鍵結之基的化合物。 上述能量線聚合性不飽和基係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基(ethenyl group)、烯丙基(2-丙烯基)等,較佳係(甲基)丙烯醯基。 能與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中之官能基鍵結的基,係可舉例如:能與羥基或胺基鍵結的異氰酸酯基及環氧丙基、以及能與羧基或環氧基鍵結的羥基及胺基等。The above-mentioned unsaturated group-containing compound is not only the above-mentioned energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group, but also has the function of reacting with the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) to react with the adhesive resin (I-1a). Bonded base compounds. The aforementioned energy ray polymerizable unsaturated group can be, for example, (meth)acryl, vinyl (ethenyl group), allyl (2-propenyl), etc., preferably (meth)acryl. The group capable of bonding to the functional group in the adhesive resin (I-1a) includes, for example, an isocyanate group and a glycidyl group capable of bonding to a hydroxyl group or an amine group, and a group capable of bonding to a carboxyl group or an epoxy group. The hydroxyl group and amino group of the junction.

上述含不飽和基化合物係可舉例如:異氰酸(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing compound include (meth)acryloxyethyl isocyanate, (meth)acryl isocyanate, glycidyl (meth)acrylate, and the like.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The adhesive resin (I-2a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含有量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-2)總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係10~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 5-99% by mass, more preferably 10-99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-2). 95% by mass, and 10-90% by mass of the extra-premium series.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-2a)係使用例如與黏著性樹脂(I-1a)中同樣之具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-2)亦可更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the adhesive resin (I-2a) is, for example, the same acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer as in the adhesive resin (I-1a), the adhesive composition (I-2 ) may further contain a crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述交聯劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-2) includes the same ones as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The cross-linking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的交聯劑含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.1~20質量份、特佳係0.3~15質量份。The content of the crosslinking agent in the above adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). 0.3 to 15 parts by mass of Tejia.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-2)係即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-2) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-2) containing a photopolymerization initiator fully advances hardening reaction even when irradiated with energy rays of relatively low energy such as ultraviolet rays.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) includes the same ones as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的光聚合起始劑含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-2) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.03 to 10 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). Parts by mass, especially 0.05-5 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述其他添加劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. The above-mentioned other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same ones as the other additives in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的其他添加劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-2) is not particularly limited, as long as they are properly selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-2)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的上述溶劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-2)中的溶劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-2) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-2) include the same solvents as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-2) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-2) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

<黏著劑組成物(I-3)> 上述黏著劑組成物(I-3)係如上述,含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-2a)、與能量線硬化性化合物。<Adhesive composition (I-3)> The above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-3) contains the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-2a) and an energy ray-curable compound as described above.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含有量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-3)總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 5-99% by mass, more preferably 10-99% by mass relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-3). 95% by mass, and 15-90% by mass of the extra-premium series.

[能量線硬化性化合物] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,可列舉具有能量線聚合性不飽和基、利用能量線照射便可硬化的單體及寡聚物,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)所含有能量線硬化性化合物相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Energy Beam Curing Compound] The above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) includes monomers and oligomers that have an energy-ray-polymerizable unsaturated group and can be cured by irradiation with energy rays. Composition (I-1) contains the same energy ray curable compound. The above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的上述能量線硬化性化合物含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~300質量份、更佳係0.03~200質量份、特佳係0.05~100質量份。The content of the above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound in the above-mentioned adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 0.01 to 300 parts by mass, more preferably 0.03 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-2a). ~200 parts by mass, and 0.05~100 parts by mass of the extra-fine series.

[光聚合起始劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)亦可更進一步含有光聚合起始劑。含有光聚合起始劑的黏著劑組成物(I-3)係即便照射紫外線等較低能量的能量線,仍充分進行硬化反應。[Photopolymerization Initiator] The adhesive composition (I-3) may further contain a photopolymerization initiator. The adhesive composition (I-3) containing a photopolymerization initiator fully advances hardening reaction even when irradiated with energy rays of relatively low energy such as ultraviolet rays.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的上述光聚合起始劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的光聚合起始劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的光聚合起始劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) includes the same ones as the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-1). The photopolymerization initiator contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的光聚合起始劑含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-2a)與上述能量線硬化性化合物的總含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.03~10質量份、特佳係0.05~5質量份。The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the adhesive composition (I-3) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the total content of the adhesive resin (I-2a) and the energy ray-curable compound. Parts by mass, more preferably 0.03-10 parts by mass, and especially preferred 0.05-5 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the above-mentioned other additives include the same ones as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的其他添加劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-3) is not particularly limited, as long as they are properly selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-3)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的上述溶劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-3)中的溶劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-3) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-3) include the same solvents as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-3) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-3) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

<黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物> 截至目前主要針對黏著劑組成物(I-1)、黏著劑組成物(I-2)及黏著劑組成物(I-3)進行說明,惟已說明的這些組成物的含有成分,仍同樣可使用在這3種黏著劑組成物以外的所有黏著劑組成物(本說明書中亦稱「黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物」)。<Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)> Up to now, the descriptions have mainly focused on the adhesive composition (I-1), adhesive composition (I-2), and adhesive composition (I-3), but the components contained in these compositions that have been described can still be used in the same way. All adhesive compositions other than these three adhesive compositions (also referred to as "adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3)" in this specification) are used.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物係能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物之外,亦可列舉非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物。 非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物係可舉例如含有:丙烯酸系樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、環氧系樹脂、聚乙烯醚、聚碳酸酯、酯系樹脂等非能量線硬化性黏著性樹脂(I-1a)的黏著劑組成物(I-4),較佳係含有丙烯酸系樹脂。Adhesive compositions other than the adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) include energy ray-curable adhesive compositions, and non-energy ray-curable adhesive compositions. The composition of the non-energy ray-curable adhesive can include, for example, acrylic resin, urethane resin, rubber resin, silicone resin, epoxy resin, polyvinyl ether, polycarbonate, ester The adhesive composition (I-4) that is a non-energy ray-curable adhesive resin (I-1a) such as resin preferably contains an acrylic resin.

黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物,較佳係含有1種或2種以上的交聯劑,且含有量係可設為與上述黏著劑組成物(I-1)等的情況相同。Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1) to (I-3) preferably contain one or more crosslinking agents, and the content can be set to the same amount as the above-mentioned adhesive composition The same applies to (I-1) and the like.

<黏著劑組成物(I-4)> 黏著劑組成物(I-4)較佳可列舉含有上述黏著性樹脂(I-1a)、與交聯劑者。<Adhesive composition (I-4)> Adhesive composition (I-4) preferably includes one containing the above-mentioned adhesive resin (I-1a) and a crosslinking agent.

[黏著性樹脂(I-1a)] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a),可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Adhesive resin (I-1a)] The adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) includes the same ones as the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-1). The adhesive resin (I-1a) contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含有量,相對於黏著劑組成物(I-4)的總質量,較佳係5~99質量%、更佳係10~95質量%、特佳係15~90質量%。The content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive composition (I-4) is preferably 5 to 99% by mass, more preferably 10%, relative to the total mass of the adhesive composition (I-4). ~95% by mass, 15% to 90% by mass for extra-fine products.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中,黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含有量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含有量的比例(即,黏著劑層的黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含有量),較佳係30~90質量%、更佳係40~85質量%、特佳係50~80質量%。In the adhesive composition (I-4), the ratio of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a) in the adhesive layer) , preferably 30-90% by mass, more preferably 40-85% by mass, and most preferably 50-80% by mass.

[交聯劑] 黏著性樹脂(I-1a)係由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元之外,更進一步使用具有由含官能基單體所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體時,黏著劑組成物(I-4)較佳係更進一步含有交聯劑。[Crosslinking agent] When the adhesive resin (I-1a) is derived from a structural unit derived from an alkyl (meth)acrylate, when the above-mentioned acrylic polymer having a structural unit derived from a functional group-containing monomer is further used, the adhesive composition The substance (I-4) preferably further contains a crosslinking agent.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的交聯劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)的交聯劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的交聯劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。Examples of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) are the same as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The cross-linking agent contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的交聯劑含有量,相對於黏著性樹脂(I-1a)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~50質量份、更佳係0.3~50質量份、特佳係1~50質量份,例如可為10~50質量份、15~50質量份、及20~50質量份等中之任一者。The content of the crosslinking agent in the adhesive composition (I-4) is preferably 0.01 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the adhesive resin (I-1a). 1 to 50 parts by mass, especially 1 to 50 parts by mass, for example, any of 10 to 50 parts by mass, 15 to 50 parts by mass, and 20 to 50 parts by mass.

[其他添加劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有不隸屬上述任一成分的其他添加劑。 上述其他添加劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的其他添加劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的其他添加劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Other additives] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain other additives that do not belong to any of the above-mentioned components within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Examples of the above-mentioned other additives include the same ones as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The other additives contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的其他添加劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要配合種類再行適當選擇便可。The content of other additives in the adhesive composition (I-4) is not particularly limited, as long as they are properly selected according to the type.

[溶劑] 黏著劑組成物(I-4)係在與黏著劑組成物(I-1)情況的同樣目的下,亦可含有溶劑。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的上述溶劑,可列舉與黏著劑組成物(I-1)中的溶劑相同者。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 黏著劑組成物(I-4)中的溶劑含有量並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可。[solvent] The adhesive composition (I-4) may contain a solvent for the same purpose as in the case of the adhesive composition (I-1). Examples of the solvent in the adhesive composition (I-4) include the same solvents as those in the adhesive composition (I-1). The solvent system contained in the adhesive composition (I-4) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily. The solvent content in the adhesive composition (I-4) is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately adjusted.

上述保護膜形成用複合片中,黏著劑層較佳係非能量線硬化性。理由係若黏著劑層為能量線硬化性,則當利用能量線照射而使保護膜形成用薄膜硬化時,有無法抑制黏著劑層亦同時硬化的情形。若黏著劑層會與保護膜形成用薄膜同時硬化,則硬化後的保護膜形成用薄膜(即保護膜)與黏著劑層會在其界面出現無法剝離程度的貼附。此情況,較難將背面設有經硬化後保護膜形成用薄膜(即保護膜)的半導體晶片(具保護膜之半導體晶片),從包括硬化後黏著劑層的支撐片上剝離,導致具保護膜之半導體晶片無法正常拾取。上述支撐片中,將黏著劑層設為非能量線硬化性,便可確實迴避此種不良情況,俾能更輕易地拾取具保護膜之半導體晶片。In the above composite sheet for forming a protective film, the adhesive layer is preferably non-energy ray curable. The reason is that if the adhesive layer is energy ray curable, when the film for forming a protective film is cured by energy ray irradiation, the adhesive layer may not be cured at the same time. If the adhesive layer is cured simultaneously with the film for forming a protective film, the film for forming a protective film (that is, the protective film) after hardening and the adhesive layer will be adhered to such an extent that they cannot be peeled off at the interface. In this case, it is more difficult to peel off the semiconductor wafer (semiconductor wafer with protective film) with a hardened protective film forming film (i.e. protective film) on the back from the support sheet including the hardened adhesive layer, resulting in a protective film. The semiconductor chip cannot be picked up normally. In the above-mentioned supporting sheet, setting the adhesive layer as non-energy ray curable can surely avoid such disadvantages, so that the semiconductor wafer with the protective film can be picked up more easily.

此處雖針對黏著劑層係非能量線硬化性時的效果進行說明,但即便與支撐片之保護膜形成用薄膜直接接觸的層係黏著劑層以外的層,只要此層係非能量線硬化性,仍可達同樣效果。Here, the effect of the non-energy ray curable adhesive layer is described, but even if the layer other than the adhesive layer is in direct contact with the protective film forming film of the support sheet, as long as the layer is non-energy ray curable , still achieve the same effect.

<<黏著劑組成物之製造方法>> 黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)、黏著劑組成物(I-4)等除黏著劑組成物(I-1)~(I-3)以外的黏著劑組成物,係藉由將上述黏著劑、與視需要的上述黏著劑以外的成分等構成黏著劑組成物的各成分,予以摻合便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分混合來使用。 摻合時,將各成分混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加、及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Manufacturing method of adhesive composition>> Adhesive compositions other than adhesive compositions (I-1)~(I-3), such as adhesive compositions (I-1)~(I-3), adhesive compositions (I-4), are It can be obtained by blending the above-mentioned adhesive and, if necessary, components other than the above-mentioned adhesive, and other components constituting the adhesive composition. The order of addition of the respective components is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any blending ingredient other than the solvent, and then the blended ingredient can be used after pre-diluted, or it can be used without pre-diluting any blended ingredient other than the solvent. A solvent is used in admixture with these blending components. When blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, for example: a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing by using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves, etc. Properly selected from known methods. The addition of each component, and the temperature and time of mixing are on the premise that each blending component will not deteriorate, and there is no special limitation, as long as it is properly adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

◎保護膜形成用薄膜 上述保護膜形成用薄膜係藉由硬化、或未硬化而維持原狀態下形成保護膜。此保護膜係供保護半導體晶圓或半導體晶片的背面(臨電極形成面的相反側的面)用。保護膜形成用薄膜係軟質,可輕易貼附於貼附標的物上。◎Films for protective film formation The above thin film for forming a protective film forms a protective film by being cured, or by being uncured and maintaining the original state. This protective film is used to protect the semiconductor wafer or the back surface of the semiconductor wafer (the surface opposite to the electrode formation surface). The protective film forming film is soft and can be easily attached to the object to be attached.

上述保護膜形成用薄膜係可為硬化性、亦可為非硬化性。 硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜係可為熱硬化性及能量線硬化性中之任一者、亦可具有熱硬化性與能量線硬化性雙方特性。 保護膜形成用薄膜係使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組成物便可形成。The above-mentioned thin film for protective film formation may be curable or non-curable. The thin film for forming a curable protective film may be either thermosetting or energy ray curable, or may have both thermosetting and energy ray curable properties. The thin film for protective film formation can be formed using the composition for protective film formation containing the constituent material.

本說明書中,所謂「非硬化性」係指不管利用加熱、能量線照射等任何手段均不會硬化的性質。 本發明中,在即便將保護膜形成用薄膜硬化後,仍可維持支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物(換言之,支撐片與保護膜)的積層構造前提下,將此積層體稱為「保護膜形成用複合片」。In this specification, "non-curable" refers to the property that it will not be cured regardless of any means such as heating or energy ray irradiation. In the present invention, even after curing the film for forming a protective film, the laminate structure of the cured product of the support sheet and the film for forming the protective film (in other words, the support sheet and the protective film) can be maintained, this laminate is referred to as "Composite sheet for protective film formation".

保護膜形成用薄膜係不管種類如何,均可由1層(單層)構成、亦可由2層以上的複數層構成。當保護膜形成用薄膜係由複數層構成的情況,這些複數層係相互可為相同、亦可為不同。The thin film for protective film formation may consist of 1 layer (single layer), or may consist of plural layers of 2 or more layers, regardless of its kind. When the thin film for protective film formation consists of plural layers, these plural layers may mutually be the same, and may be different.

此處,再度參照圖4,針對黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜更進一步詳細說明。 如前所說明,基材11的第1面11a係凹凸面。但,黏著劑層12中,若例如其S值達1.5μm以上,便抑制此凹凸面的影響,降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度。所以,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13間之積層性呈良好。例如即便在黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13之間,存在有這些未貼合的區域(未貼合區域)92,但其數量在橫跨保護膜形成用複合片1A中的保護膜形成用薄膜13形成區域總域中,仍在3處以下等極少狀態。上述未貼合區域92係例如從基材11側觀察保護膜形成用複合片1A便可輕易確認。Here, referring to FIG. 4 again, the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film will be further described in detail. As described above, the first surface 11a of the substrate 11 is a concave-convex surface. However, if the S value of the adhesive layer 12 is, for example, 1.5 μm or more, the influence of the uneven surface is suppressed, and the degree of unevenness of the first surface 12 a of the adhesive layer 12 is reduced. Therefore, the laminarity between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for protective film formation becomes favorable. For example, even if there are these unbonded regions (non-bonded regions) 92 between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for forming a protective film, the number of them spans the protective film in the composite sheet 1A for forming a protective film. In the total area where the formation thin film 13 is formed, there are still very few places such as three or less. The non-bonded region 92 can be easily confirmed by observing the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation, for example from the base material 11 side.

再者,保護膜形成用複合片1A係即便具有此種未貼合區域92,在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向上的未貼合區域92大小(層間距離)為例如0.5μm以下之保護膜形成用複合片1A,其黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13間之積層性更良好。此處所謂「未貼合區域92大小(層間距離)」,係指「在保護膜形成用複合片1A厚度方向,黏著劑層12與保護膜形成用薄膜13間之層間距離」。Furthermore, even if the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation has such an unbonded region 92, the size (distance between layers) of the non-bonded region 92 in the thickness direction of the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation is, for example, 0.5 μm or less. In the composite sheet 1A for film formation, the laminarity between the adhesive layer 12 and the film 13 for protective film formation is more favorable. Here, "the size of the unbonded region 92 (interlayer distance)" means "the interlayer distance between the adhesive layer 12 and the protective film forming film 13 in the thickness direction of the protective film forming composite sheet 1A".

未貼合區域92的大小(上述層間距離),係與上述未貼合區域91的上述層間距離最大值(大小)同樣,較佳係0.5μm以下,例如可為0.4μm以下、0.3μm以下、0.2μm以下及0.1μm以下中之任一者。The size (the above-mentioned interlayer distance) of the unbonded region 92 is the same as the maximum value (size) of the above-mentioned interlayer distance of the above-mentioned unbonded region 91, preferably 0.5 μm or less, for example, 0.4 μm or less, 0.3 μm or less, Either of 0.2 μm or less and 0.1 μm or less.

未貼合區域92的大小(層間距離)係例如成為對象的雙層組合不同之外,依照與上述未貼合區域91大小(層間距離)的情況相同方法,便可求取。The size (distance between layers) of the unbonded region 92 can be obtained in the same way as the size (distance between layers) of the above-mentioned unbonded region 91, except that the target double-layer combination is different.

保護膜形成用複合片1A亦有完全未存在未貼合區域92的情形。The composite sheet 1A for protective film formation may not exist the non-bonding area|region 92 at all.

另一方面,如上述,若降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度,保護膜形成用薄膜13的厚度Tp 並非固定,而是依照保護膜形成用薄膜13(黏著劑層12)的部位會有變動,但其變動幅度極小。On the other hand, as described above, if the unevenness of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 is reduced, the thickness T p of the film 13 for forming a protective film is not constant, but depends on the thickness Tp of the film 13 for forming a protective film (adhesive layer 12). There will be changes in the position, but the range of changes is very small.

再者,如上述,若降低黏著劑層12的第1面12a之凹凸度,保護膜形成用薄膜13臨黏著劑層12的側的面(第2面)13b便為平滑、或降低凹凸度。所以,不會損及保護膜形成用薄膜13的外觀。 所以,若由上述保護膜形成用薄膜13形成保護膜,則所形成的保護膜臨黏著劑層12側的面(第2面)仍可呈平滑、或降低凹凸度,不致損及保護膜外觀。 依此,保護膜形成用複合片1A中,保護膜形成用薄膜13與保護膜均可成為設計性優異。Furthermore, as described above, if the unevenness of the first surface 12a of the adhesive layer 12 is reduced, the surface (second surface) 13b of the film 13 for forming a protective film on the side facing the adhesive layer 12 is smooth, or the unevenness is reduced. . Therefore, the appearance of the film 13 for protective film formation is not impaired. Therefore, if the protective film is formed from the film 13 for forming the protective film, the surface (second surface) of the formed protective film on the side facing the adhesive layer 12 can still be smooth, or the unevenness can be reduced, without damaging the appearance of the protective film. . Accordingly, in the composite sheet 1A for protective film formation, both the thin film 13 for protective film formation and a protective film can be excellent in design property.

保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b,凸部最高部位、與凹部最深部位間之最大高低差,較佳係在2μm以下,例如可為1.5μm以下、及1μm以下中之任一者。此種保護膜形成用薄膜13與保護膜的設計性特優。On the second surface 13b of the film 13 for forming a protective film, the maximum height difference between the highest portion of the convex portion and the deepest portion of the concave portion is preferably 2 μm or less, for example, either 1.5 μm or less and 1 μm or less. Such a protective film forming thin film 13 and protective film are particularly excellent in design.

保護膜形成用薄膜13的第2面13b之上述最大高低差,係例如利用前所說明的方法,由保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片或保護膜形成用複合片自體形成截面,再使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),藉由觀察此截面便可求得。The above-mentioned maximum height difference of the second surface 13b of the film 13 for protective film formation is, for example, using the method described above to form a cross section of the test piece of the composite sheet for protective film formation or the composite sheet itself for protective film formation, and then use A scanning electron microscope (SEM) can be obtained by observing this section.

此處雖舉保護膜形成用複合片1A為例,針對黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜進行說明,但關於保護膜形成用複合片1B、保護膜形成用複合片1C等其他實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片的情況,亦是同樣的黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜。Here, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1A is taken as an example, and the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film are described. However, the protection of the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1B, the composite sheet for forming a protective film 1C, etc. In the case of the composite sheet for film formation, the adhesive layer and the film for protective film formation are the same.

本發明的保護膜形成用複合片中,保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度(例如Tp )較佳係1~100μm、更佳係3~75μm、特佳係5~50μm。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度達上述下限值以上,便可形成更高保護能力的保護膜。藉由保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度在上述上限值以下,抑制厚度過厚。In the composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention, the thickness (for example, T p ) of the thin film for forming a protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 3 to 75 μm, and most preferably 5 to 50 μm. When the thickness of the thin film for protective film formation is more than the said lower limit, the protective film of higher protective ability can be formed. When the thickness of the film for protective film formation is below the said upper limit, thickness is suppressed from becoming too thick.

當保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度會依保護膜形成用薄膜的部位而有所變動的情況,則保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最小值可在上述下限值以上,且保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最大值可在上述上限值以下。When the thickness of the film for forming a protective film varies depending on the position of the film for forming a protective film, the minimum thickness of the film for forming a protective film may be more than the above lower limit, and the thickness of the film for forming a protective film The maximum value may be below the above-mentioned upper limit value.

另外,所謂「保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度」,係指保護膜形成用薄膜全體的厚度,例如由複數層構成的保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度,係指構成保護膜形成用薄膜的所有層之合計厚度。In addition, the "thickness of the film for forming a protective film" refers to the thickness of the film for forming a protective film as a whole. For example, the thickness of a film for forming a protective film composed of multiple layers refers to the thickness of all the layers constituting the film for forming a protective film. total thickness.

保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度係例如使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察保護膜形成用薄膜的側面或截面便可測定。 保護膜形成用薄膜的截面係例如依照與上述支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的試驗片截面的情況之同樣方法便可形成。The thickness of the film for protective film formation can be measured by observing the side surface or cross-section of the film for protective film formation, for example using a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The cross section of the film for forming a protective film can be formed, for example, in the same manner as in the cross section of the test piece of the support sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film described above.

例如利用前所說明的方法,從保護膜形成用複合片的複數個地方(例如5個地方)切取試驗片,針對此試驗片求取保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度最小值與最大值,再從這些數值求取這些最小值平均值與最大值平均值時,上述最小值平均值可達上述保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度下限值以上,且上述最大值平均值可在上述保護膜形成用薄膜的厚度上限值以下。For example, using the method described above, a test piece is cut from a plurality of places (for example, 5 places) of the composite sheet for forming a protective film, and the minimum and maximum thickness values of the film for forming a protective film are obtained for the test piece, and then obtained from When calculating the average value of the minimum value and the average value of the maximum value of these numerical values, the average value of the above-mentioned minimum value can be more than the lower limit value of the thickness of the film for forming a protective film, and the average value of the above-mentioned maximum value can be obtained in the film for forming a protective film. below the upper limit of thickness.

保護膜形成用薄膜係使用含有其構成材料的保護膜形成用組成物便可形成。例如在保護膜形成用薄膜的形成標的面上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,視需要施行乾燥,便可在目標部位處形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用組成物中在常溫不會氣化的成分間之含有量比率,通常係同保護膜形成用薄膜的上述成分間之含有量比率。The thin film for protective film formation can be formed using the composition for protective film formation containing the constituent material. For example, the composition for forming a protective film is coated on the surface to be formed of the thin film for forming a protective film, and dried if necessary, so that the thin film for forming a protective film can be formed at the target site. The content ratio of the components that do not vaporize at normal temperature in the composition for forming a protective film is generally the same as the content ratio of the above-mentioned components in the thin film for forming a protective film.

保護形成用組成物的塗佈係可利用公知方法實行,例如使用氣刀塗佈機、刮刀塗佈機、棒式塗佈機、凹版塗佈機、輥式塗佈機、輥式刀塗機、淋幕塗佈機、模塗機、刀塗機、網版塗佈機、麥勒棒塗機、吻合式塗佈機等各種塗佈機的方法。The coating of the protective forming composition can be carried out by a known method, for example, using an air knife coater, a knife coater, a bar coater, a gravure coater, a roll coater, or a roll knife coater. , curtain coater, die coater, knife coater, screen coater, Mailer rod coater, kiss coater and other coating machine methods.

保護膜形成用組成物的乾燥條件並無特別的限定,當保護膜形成用組成物含有後述溶劑的情況,以使其加熱乾燥為佳。而,含有溶劑的保護膜形成用組成物,是以以例如70~130℃、10秒~5分鐘的條件施行乾燥為佳。但,當保護膜形成用組成物係熱硬化性的情況,則以以所形成保護膜形成用薄膜不會熱硬化的方式,使保護膜形成用組成物乾燥為佳。The drying conditions of the composition for forming a protective film are not particularly limited, but when the composition for forming a protective film contains a solvent described later, it is preferable to dry it by heating. On the other hand, the composition for forming a protective film containing a solvent is preferably dried at, for example, 70 to 130° C. for 10 seconds to 5 minutes. However, when the composition for forming a protective film is thermosetting, it is preferable to dry the composition for forming a protective film so that the formed thin film for forming a protective film will not be cured by heat.

以下,針對保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜形成用組成物,依照種類別進行詳細說明。Hereinafter, the thin film for protective film formation and the composition for protective film formation are demonstrated in detail by kind.

○熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,可列舉含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)者。 聚合體成分(A)係可視為由聚合性化合物進行聚合反應而形成的成分。 熱硬化性成分(B)係能以熱為反應的觸發,進行硬化(聚合)反應的成分。另外,本發明的聚合反應亦包括縮聚反應。○Films for thermosetting protective film formation Preferable films for forming a thermosetting protective film include those containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B). The polymer component (A) can be regarded as a component formed by polymerizing a polymerizable compound. The thermosetting component (B) is a component capable of performing a curing (polymerization) reaction using heat as a reaction trigger. In addition, the polymerization reaction in the present invention also includes polycondensation reaction.

將熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶圓的背面之後,使熱硬化時的硬化條件,在硬化物成為充分發揮其機能程度的硬化度前提下,並無特別的限定,可配合熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類再行適當選擇。 例如熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的熱硬化時的加熱溫度,較佳係100~200℃、更佳係110~180℃、特佳係120~170℃。而,上述硬化時的加熱時間較佳係0.5~5小時、更佳係0.5~3小時、特佳係1~2小時。After the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is attached to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the curing conditions for thermal curing are not particularly limited, provided that the cured product has a degree of hardening that fully exerts its functions. The type of film for forming a thermosetting protective film is appropriately selected. For example, the heating temperature during thermosetting of the thermosetting protective film forming film is preferably 100 to 200°C, more preferably 110 to 180°C, and most preferably 120 to 170°C. On the other hand, the heating time during the above curing is preferably 0.5 to 5 hours, more preferably 0.5 to 3 hours, and most preferably 1 to 2 hours.

<熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)> 較佳熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物,可列舉例如:含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱「組成物(III-1)」)等。<Thermosetting protective film forming composition (III-1)> Preferable compositions for forming a thermosetting protective film include, for example, composition (III-1) for forming a thermosetting protective film containing a polymer component (A) and a thermosetting component (B) (in this specification Also referred to as "composition (III-1)") and the like.

[聚合體成分(A)] 聚合體成分(A)係供對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等的成分。 組成物(III-1)與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的聚合體成分(A),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[polymer component (A)] The polymer component (A) is a component for imparting film formability, flexibility, and the like to the film for forming a thermosetting protective film. The polymer component (A) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination thereof and The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

聚合體成分(A)係可舉例如:丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、胺甲酸乙酯系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚矽氧系樹脂、橡膠系樹脂、苯氧樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺等,較佳係丙烯酸系樹脂。Examples of the polymer component (A) include acrylic resins, polyesters, urethane resins, urethane acrylate resins, silicone resins, rubber resins, phenoxy resins, and thermosetting polymers. Amide, etc., preferably acrylic resin.

聚合體成分(A)中的上述丙烯酸系樹脂,可列舉公知的丙烯酸聚合體。 丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳係10000~2000000、更佳係100000~1500000。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量達上述下限值以上,則提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的形狀安定性(保管時的經時安定性)。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的重量平均分子量在上述上限值以下,則熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜會輕易追隨被黏物的凹凸面,更加抑制被黏物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜間發生孔隙等。The above-mentioned acrylic resin in the polymer component (A) includes known acrylic polymers. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the acrylic resin is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably 100,000 to 1,500,000. When the weight average molecular weight of an acrylic resin is more than the said lower limit, the shape stability (time-dependent stability at the time of storage) of the film for thermosetting protective film formation will improve. In addition, when the weight average molecular weight of the acrylic resin is below the above-mentioned upper limit, the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film will easily follow the uneven surface of the adherend, and the adhesion between the adherend and the thermosetting protective film will be further suppressed. Voids and the like occur between films.

本說明書中,所謂「重量平均分子量」在無特別聲明前提下,係指利用凝膠滲透色層分析儀(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, the "weight average molecular weight" refers to a polystyrene-equivalent value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.

丙烯酸系樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳係-60~70℃、更佳係-30~50℃。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg達上述下限值以上,抑制例如保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物(即保護膜)與支撐片間之接著力,俾適度提升支撐片的剝離性。又,藉由丙烯酸系樹脂的Tg在上述上限值以下,則提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的被黏物間之接著力。 另外,不僅侷限於丙烯酸系樹,本說明書中的樹脂Tg係例如使用微分掃描熱量計(DSC),將升溫速度或降溫速度設為10℃/min,使測定標的物溫度在-70℃至150℃間變化,藉由確認反曲點便可求得。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the acrylic resin is preferably -60 to 70°C, more preferably -30 to 50°C. When the Tg of the acrylic resin is equal to or higher than the above lower limit, for example, the adhesive force between the hardened film for forming a protective film (that is, the protective film) and the support sheet is suppressed, so that the peelability of the support sheet is moderately improved. Moreover, when Tg of an acrylic resin is below the said upper limit, the adhesive force between the film for thermosetting protective film formation and the to-be-adhered body of a protective film improves. In addition, not limited to acrylic resins, resin Tg systems in this specification, for example, use a differential scanning calorimeter (DSC), set the heating rate or cooling rate to 10°C/min, and make the temperature of the measurement object range from -70°C to 150°C. The change between ℃ can be obtained by confirming the inflection point.

丙烯酸系樹脂係可舉例如:1種或2種以上(甲基)丙烯酸酯的聚合體;從(甲基)丙烯酸、衣康酸、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之中選擇2種以上單體的共聚物等。Acrylic resins can be, for example, polymers of one or more (meth)acrylates; from (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene and N-methylol Among acrylamide and the like, a copolymer of two or more monomers is selected.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂的上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18的鏈狀構造(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯氧基烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸醯亞胺; (甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等含環氧丙基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯; (甲基)丙烯酸-N-甲胺基乙酯等含取代胺基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。此處所謂「取代胺基」係指胺基的1個或2個氫原子,被氫原子以外之基取代而成的基。The above-mentioned (meth)acrylate constituting the acrylic resin includes, for example, methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ester, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate base) hexyl acrylate, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid n-nonyl, isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate ), tridecyl (meth)acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Cetyl ester (palm (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. The alkyl group of the base ester is a chain structure (meth)acrylic acid alkyl ester with 1 to 18 carbon atoms; Cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isocamphoryl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate; Aralkyl (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as dicyclopentenyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyloxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate; (meth)acrylic imide; Glycidyl (meth)acrylate and other glycidyl-containing (meth)acrylates; Hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid -2-Hydroxybutyl, (meth)acrylate-3-hydroxybutyl, (meth)acrylate-4-hydroxybutyl and other hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylates; (Meth)acrylic acid-N-methylaminoethyl ester and other (meth)acrylates containing substituted amino groups. The term "substituted amino group" herein refers to a group in which one or two hydrogen atoms of an amino group are substituted with a group other than a hydrogen atom.

丙烯酸系樹脂係例如除上述(甲基)丙烯酸酯之外,尚亦可由從(甲基)丙烯酸、衣康酸、醋酸乙烯酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯及N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等之中選擇1種或2種以上的單體,進行共聚合而成者。Acrylic resins, for example, in addition to the above-mentioned (meth)acrylates, can also be made of (meth)acrylic acid, itaconic acid, vinyl acetate, acrylonitrile, styrene, and N-methylolacrylamide. One or two or more monomers are selected and copolymerized.

構成丙烯酸系樹脂的單體係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The monomer system constituting the acrylic resin may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

丙烯酸系樹脂亦可具有例如:乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等的能與其他化合物鍵結的官能基。丙烯酸系樹脂的上述官能基係可經由後述交聯劑(F)而與其他化合物鍵結,亦可在未經由交聯劑(F)情況下直接鍵結於其他化合物。藉由丙烯酸系樹脂利用上述官能基而與其他化合物鍵結,便具有提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得封裝之可靠度的傾向。The acrylic resin may have functional groups capable of bonding with other compounds such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups, for example. The above-mentioned functional groups of the acrylic resin may be bonded to other compounds through a crosslinking agent (F) described later, or may be directly bonded to other compounds without passing through a crosslinking agent (F). When the acrylic resin is bonded to other compounds using the above-mentioned functional group, there is a tendency to improve the reliability of the package obtained using the composite sheet for forming a protective film.

本發明中,聚合體成分(A)係可未使用丙烯酸系樹脂情況下,單獨使用丙烯酸系樹脂以外的熱可塑性樹脂(以下亦簡稱「熱可塑性樹脂」),亦可併用丙烯酸系樹脂。藉由使用上述熱可塑性樹脂,則提升保護膜從支撐片的剝離性、使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜輕易追隨被黏物的凹凸面等,有時會更加抑制被黏物與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜間發生孔隙等。In the present invention, the polymer component (A) may be a thermoplastic resin other than an acrylic resin (hereinafter also referred to as "thermoplastic resin") alone or in combination without using an acrylic resin. By using the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet is improved, and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can easily follow the uneven surface of the adherend. Voids and the like are generated between the thin films for forming a protective film.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的重量平均分子量較佳係1000~100000、更佳係3000~80000。The weight average molecular weight of the thermoplastic resin is preferably 1,000 to 100,000, more preferably 3,000 to 80,000.

上述熱可塑性樹脂的玻璃轉移溫度(Tg)較佳係-30~150℃、更佳係-20~120℃。The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the thermoplastic resin is preferably -30 to 150°C, more preferably -20 to 120°C.

上述熱可塑性樹脂,可舉例如:聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等。The aforementioned thermoplastic resins include, for example, polyester, polyurethane, phenoxy resin, polybutene, polybutadiene, polystyrene, and the like.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds. In the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio thereof are Optional.

組成物(III-1)中,聚合體成分(A)含有量相對於溶劑除外所有成分總含有量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的聚合體成分(A)含有量),不管聚合體成分(A)的種類,均較佳係5~85質量%、更佳係5~75質量%,例如可為5~65質量%、5~50質量%、及10~35質量%等中之任一者。In the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the polymer component (A) to the total content of all components except the solvent (that is, the content of the polymer component (A) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film), Regardless of the type of polymer component (A), it is preferably 5-85% by mass, more preferably 5-75% by mass, for example, 5-65% by mass, 5-50% by mass, and 10-35% by mass any of these.

聚合體成分(A)會有亦屬於熱硬化性成分(B)的情況。本發明中,當組成物(III-1)係含有此種隸屬於聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)雙方的成分時,便視同組成物(III-1)係含有聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)。The polymer component (A) may also belong to the thermosetting component (B). In the present invention, when the composition (III-1) contains such components belonging to both the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B), it is deemed that the composition (III-1) contains polymer Body component (A) and thermosetting component (B).

[熱硬化性成分(B)] 熱硬化性成分(B)係供使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜硬化用的成分。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的熱硬化性成分(B),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[Thermosetting component (B)] The thermosetting component (B) is a component for hardening the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation. The thermosetting component (B) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

熱硬化性成分(B)係可舉例如:環氧系熱硬化性樹脂、熱硬化性聚醯亞胺、聚氨酯、不飽和聚酯、聚矽氧樹脂等,較佳係環氧系熱硬化性樹脂。The thermosetting component (B) can be for example: epoxy thermosetting resin, thermosetting polyimide, polyurethane, unsaturated polyester, polysiloxane resin, etc., preferably epoxy thermosetting resin resin.

(環氧系熱硬化性樹脂) 環氧系熱硬化性樹脂係由環氧樹脂(B1)與熱硬化劑(B2)構成。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的環氧系熱硬化性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。(Epoxy Thermosetting Resin) The epoxy-based thermosetting resin is composed of an epoxy resin (B1) and a thermosetting agent (B2). The epoxy-based thermosetting resin contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

・環氧樹脂(B1) 環氧樹脂(B1)可列舉公知物,例如:多官能基系環氧樹脂、聯苯化合物、雙酚A二環氧丙醚及其氫化物、鄰甲酚酚醛清漆環氧樹脂、二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂、聯苯型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、伸苯骨架型環氧樹脂等雙官能基以上的環氧化合物。・Epoxy resin (B1) Epoxy resins (B1) include known ones, for example: polyfunctional epoxy resins, biphenyl compounds, bisphenol A diglycidyl ether and its hydrides, o-cresol novolac epoxy resins, dicyclopentanyl Diene type epoxy resin, biphenyl type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, phenylene skeleton type epoxy resin and other epoxy compounds with more than two functional groups.

環氧樹脂(B1)亦可使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂。具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂之與丙烯酸系樹脂間之相溶性,較高於與未具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂間之相溶性。所以,藉由使用具有不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂,便可提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。As the epoxy resin (B1), an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group can also be used. The compatibility between epoxy resins with unsaturated hydrocarbon groups and acrylic resins is higher than that with epoxy resins without unsaturated hydrocarbon groups. Therefore, by using an epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, the reliability of a semiconductor wafer with a protective film obtained using a composite sheet for forming a protective film can be improved.

具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂係可列舉例如多官能基系環氧樹脂的部分環氧基,被轉換為具不飽和烴基之基而形成的化合物。此種化合物係例如藉由使(甲基)丙烯酸或其衍生物,對環氧基進行加成反應便可獲得。 再者,具不飽和烴基的環氧樹脂係可列舉例如在構成環氧樹脂的芳香環等,直接鍵結著具不飽和烴基之基的化合物等。 不飽和烴基係具有聚合性的不飽和基,具體例係可舉例如:乙烯基(ethenyl group)、2-丙烯基(烯丙基)、(甲基)丙烯醯基、(甲基)丙烯醯胺基等,較佳係丙烯醯基。Examples of the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include, for example, a compound in which part of the epoxy group of a polyfunctional epoxy resin is converted to a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. Such a compound can be obtained, for example, by adding (meth)acrylic acid or its derivatives to an epoxy group. In addition, examples of the epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group include compounds in which a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group is directly bonded to an aromatic ring constituting the epoxy resin, and the like. The unsaturated hydrocarbon group is a polymerizable unsaturated group. Specific examples include: vinyl (ethenyl group), 2-propenyl (allyl), (meth)acryl, (meth)acryl Amino group, etc., preferably acryl group.

環氧樹脂(B1)的數量平均分子量並無特別的限定,就從熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化性、以及硬化後的保護膜強度與耐熱性觀點,較佳係300~30000、更佳係300~10000、特佳係300~3000。The number average molecular weight of the epoxy resin (B1) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 300 to 30,000, or more, from the viewpoint of the curability of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, and the strength and heat resistance of the protective film after curing. Best series 300~10000, special best series 300~3000.

本說明書中,所謂「數量平均分子量」在無特別聲明前提下,係指利用凝膠滲透色層分析儀(GPC)法所測定的聚苯乙烯換算值。In this specification, the "number average molecular weight" refers to a polystyrene-equivalent value measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.

環氧樹脂(B1)的環氧當量較佳係100~1000g/eq、更佳係150~950g/eq。The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin (B1) is preferably 100-1000 g/eq, more preferably 150-950 g/eq.

環氧樹脂(B1)係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若倂用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。One type of epoxy resin (B1) may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When two or more types are used, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

・熱硬化劑(B2) 熱硬化劑(B2)係對環氧樹脂(B1)具有硬化劑的機能。 熱硬化劑(B2)可列舉1分子中具有2個以上能與環氧基產生反應之官能基的化合物。上述官能基係可舉例如:酚性羥基、醇性羥基、胺基、羧基、以及由酸基經酸酐化的基等,較佳係酚性羥基、胺基、或由酸基經酸酐化的基,更佳係酚性羥基或胺基。・Thermosetting agent (B2) The thermosetting agent (B2) functions as a curing agent for the epoxy resin (B1). Examples of the thermosetting agent (B2) include compounds having two or more functional groups capable of reacting with epoxy groups in one molecule. The above-mentioned functional groups can be, for example, phenolic hydroxyl groups, alcoholic hydroxyl groups, amino groups, carboxyl groups, and acid-anhydrided groups from acid groups, etc., preferably phenolic hydroxyl groups, amino groups, or acid-anhydrided groups from acid groups. A group, more preferably a phenolic hydroxyl group or an amine group.

熱硬化劑(B2)中,具有酚性羥基的酚系硬化劑係可舉例如:多官能基酚樹脂、聯苯、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等。 熱硬化劑(B2)中,具有胺基的胺系硬化劑可列舉例如:二氰二胺等。Among the thermosetting agents (B2), phenolic curing agents having phenolic hydroxyl groups include, for example, polyfunctional phenolic resins, biphenyls, novolak-type phenolic resins, dicyclopentadiene-type phenolic resins, and aralkyl-type phenolic resins. Phenolic resin etc. Among the thermosetting agents (B2), examples of the amine-based curing agent having an amino group include dicyandiamine and the like.

熱硬化劑(B2)亦可具有不飽和烴基。 具不飽和烴基的熱硬化劑(B2)係可舉例如:酚樹脂的部分羥基被具不飽和烴基的基所取代之化合物,以及在酚樹脂的芳香環直接鍵結具不飽和烴基之基而形成的化合物等。 熱硬化劑(B2)中的上述不飽和烴基,係與上述具不飽和烴基之環氧樹脂中的不飽和烴基為同樣者。The thermosetting agent (B2) may have an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. The thermosetting agent (B2) having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group can be, for example, a compound in which some of the hydroxyl groups of a phenol resin are substituted by a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group, and a compound formed by directly bonding an aromatic ring of the phenol resin to a group having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group. formed compounds, etc. The above-mentioned unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the thermosetting agent (B2) is the same as the unsaturated hydrocarbon group in the above-mentioned epoxy resin having an unsaturated hydrocarbon group.

當熱硬化劑(B2)係使用酚系硬化劑的情況,就從提升保護膜從支撐片的剝離性觀點,熱硬化劑(B2)較佳係軟化點或玻璃轉移溫度較高者。When the thermosetting agent (B2) is a phenolic curing agent, it is preferable that the thermosetting agent (B2) has a higher softening point or glass transition temperature from the viewpoint of improving the peelability of the protective film from the support sheet.

熱硬化劑(B2)中,例如多官能基酚樹脂、酚醛清漆型酚樹脂、二環戊二烯型酚樹脂、芳烷基型酚樹脂等樹脂成分的數量平均分子量,較佳係300~30000、更佳係400~10000、特佳係500~3000。 熱硬化劑(B2)中,例如聯苯、二氰二胺等非樹脂成分的分子量並無特別的限定,較佳係例如60~500。In the thermosetting agent (B2), the number average molecular weight of the resin components such as polyfunctional phenol resin, novolac type phenol resin, dicyclopentadiene type phenol resin, aralkyl type phenol resin, etc. is preferably 300~30000 , The best series is 400~10000, and the best series is 500~3000. In the thermosetting agent (B2), the molecular weight of non-resin components such as biphenyl and dicyandiamide is not particularly limited, and is preferably 60-500, for example.

熱硬化劑(B2)係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若倂用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The thermosetting agent (B2) can be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more are used, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,熱硬化劑(B2)的含有量相對於環氧樹脂(B1)的含有量100質量份,較佳係0.1~500質量份、更佳係1~200質量份,亦可例如1~100質量份、1~50質量份、1~25質量份、及1~10質量份等中之任一者。藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含有量達上述下限值以上,使熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化更容易進行。又,藉由熱硬化劑(B2)的上述含有量在上述上限值以下,降低熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的吸濕率,更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得封裝的可靠度。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is preferably 0.1 to 500 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the epoxy resin (B1) , More preferably, it is 1-200 parts by mass, and may be any one of 1-100 parts by mass, 1-50 parts by mass, 1-25 parts by mass, and 1-10 parts by mass. When the said content of a thermosetting agent (B2) is more than the said lower limit, hardening of the thin film for thermosetting protective film formation progresses more easily. In addition, when the above-mentioned content of the thermosetting agent (B2) is below the above-mentioned upper limit, the moisture absorption rate of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is reduced, and the reliability of the package obtained by using the composite sheet for forming a protective film is further improved. .

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,熱硬化性成分(B)的含有量(例如環氧樹脂(B1)與熱硬化劑(B2)的總含有量)相對於聚合體成分(A)含有量100質量份,較佳係20~500質量份、更佳係30~300質量份、特佳係40~150質量份,可例如45~100質量份、及50~80質量份等中之任一者。藉由熱硬化性成分(B)的上述含有量在此種範圍內,例如抑制保護膜形成用薄膜之硬化物與支撐片間之接著力,提升支撐片的剝離性。In the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the thermosetting component (B) (for example, the total content of the epoxy resin (B1) and the thermosetting agent (B2)) relative to The content of the polymer component (A) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 20-500 parts by mass, more preferably 30-300 parts by mass, especially 40-150 parts by mass, for example, 45-100 parts by mass, and 50-300 parts by mass. Any one of 80 parts by mass. When the content of the thermosetting component (B) is within such a range, for example, the adhesive force between the hardened film for forming a protective film and the support sheet is suppressed, and the peelability of the support sheet is improved.

[硬化促進劑(C)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有硬化促進劑(C)。硬化促進劑(C)係供調整組成物(III-1)之硬化速度的成分。 較佳硬化促進劑(C)係可舉例如:三伸乙二胺、苄基二甲胺、三乙醇胺、二甲胺基乙醇、參(二甲胺基甲基)酚等的三級胺;2-甲基咪唑、2-苯基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑、2-苯基-4-甲基-5-羥甲基咪唑等咪唑類(1個以上氫原子被氫原子以外的基所取代之咪唑);三丁膦、二苯膦、三苯膦等有機膦類(1個以上氫原子被有機基所取代的膦);四苯鏻四苯基硼酸鹽、三苯膦四苯基硼酸鹽等四苯硼酸鹽等。[Hardening Accelerator (C)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a curing accelerator (C). The hardening accelerator (C) is a component for adjusting the hardening speed of the composition (III-1). Preferred hardening accelerators (C) can include, for example, tertiary amines such as triethylenediamine, benzyldimethylamine, triethanolamine, dimethylaminoethanol, and ginseng (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol; 2-methylimidazole, 2-phenylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methylimidazole, 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylolimidazole, 2-phenyl-4-methyl-5- Imidazoles such as hydroxymethylimidazole (imidazoles in which more than one hydrogen atom is replaced by a group other than hydrogen atoms); organic phosphines such as tributylphosphine, diphenylphosphine, and triphenylphosphine (more than one hydrogen atom is replaced by an organic group) Substituted phosphine); Tetraphenylphosphonium tetraphenyl borate, triphenylphosphine tetraphenyl borate, tetraphenyl borate, etc.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的硬化促進劑(C),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The curing accelerator (C) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination thereof and The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用硬化促進劑(C)的情況,在組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,硬化促進劑(C)含有量相對於熱硬化性成分(B)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~10質量份、更佳係0.1~7質量份。藉由硬化促進劑(C)的上述含有量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用硬化促進劑(C)所造成的效果更加明顯。又,藉由硬化促進劑(C)的含有量在上述上限值以下,則例如可提高抑制高極性硬化促進劑(C)在高溫・高濕度條件下,於熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中偏析朝與被黏物間之接著界面移動的效果,更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。When the curing accelerator (C) is used, in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the curing accelerator (C) is 100% relative to the content of the thermosetting component (B). Parts by mass are preferably 0.01 to 10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7 parts by mass. When the said content of a hardening accelerator (C) is more than the said lower limit, the effect by using a hardening accelerator (C) can be made more remarkable. Moreover, when the content of the hardening accelerator (C) is below the above-mentioned upper limit, for example, it is possible to improve the inhibition of the high-polarity hardening accelerator (C) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film under high temperature and high humidity conditions. The effect of medium segregation moving toward the interface with the adherend further improves the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with protective film obtained by using the composite sheet for forming protective film.

[填充材(D)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有填充材(D)。熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜藉由含有填充材(D),可更輕易將上述吸水率與黏著力變化率調整於目標範圍內。又,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜及保護膜藉由含有填充材(D),可更輕易地調節熱膨脹係數,藉由將此熱膨脹係數對熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜或保護膜的形成標的物呈最佳化,便更加提升使用保護膜形成用複合片所獲得具保護膜之半導體晶片的可靠度。又,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜藉由含有填充材(D),亦可降低保護膜的吸濕率、提升散熱性等。[Filler (D)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a filler (D). When the film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains the filler (D), it is possible to more easily adjust the above-mentioned water absorption rate and adhesive force change rate within the target range. In addition, by containing the filler (D) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the protective film, the coefficient of thermal expansion can be adjusted more easily. Optimizing the target will further enhance the reliability of the semiconductor wafer with protective film obtained by using the composite sheet for forming protective film. Moreover, when the film for thermosetting protective film formation contains a filler (D), the moisture absorption rate of a protective film can also be reduced, and heat dissipation property etc. can be improved.

填充材(D)係有機填充材與無機填充材任一者均可,較佳係無機填充材。 較佳無機填充材係可舉例如:二氧化矽、氧化鋁、滑石、碳酸鈣、鈦白、氧化鐵紅、碳化矽、氮化硼等粉末;將這些無機填充材施行球形化後的球珠;這些無機填充材的表面改質物;這些無機填充材的單結晶纖維;玻璃纖維等。 這些之中,無機填充材較佳係二氧化矽或氧化鋁、更佳係二氧化矽。The filler (D) may be either an organic filler or an inorganic filler, and is preferably an inorganic filler. Preferred inorganic fillers include powders such as silicon dioxide, alumina, talc, calcium carbonate, titanium dioxide, red iron oxide, silicon carbide, and boron nitride; balls made by spheroidizing these inorganic fillers ; surface modifiers of these inorganic fillers; single crystal fibers of these inorganic fillers; glass fibers, etc. Among these, the inorganic filler is preferably silica or alumina, more preferably silica.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的填充材(D),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The filler (D) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type or two or more types. If there are two or more types, the combination and ratio The system can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用填充材(D)的情況,組成物(III-1)中,填充材(D)含有量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含有量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的填充材(D)含有量),較佳係5~80質量%、更佳係10~70質量%,例如可為20~65質量%、30~65質量%及40~65質量%等中之任一者。藉由填充材(D)含有量在此種範圍內,便更輕易調整上述熱膨脹係數,且更加提升保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的強度。When the filler (D) is used, in the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the filler (D) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the filling of the thermosetting protective film forming film) Material (D) content), preferably 5-80% by mass, more preferably 10-70% by mass, for example, any of 20-65% by mass, 30-65% by mass and 40-65% by mass one. When the content of the filler (D) is within such a range, the above-mentioned coefficient of thermal expansion can be adjusted more easily, and the strength of the film for forming a protective film and the protective film can be further improved.

[偶合劑(E)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有偶合劑(E)。偶合劑(E)係藉由使用具有能與無機化合物或有機化合物產生反應之官能基者,便可提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜對被黏物的接著性與密接性。又,藉由使用偶合劑(E),熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的硬化物(保護膜)便可在不會損及耐熱性情況下,提升耐水性。[Coupling agent (E)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a coupling agent (E). The use of the coupling agent (E) having a functional group capable of reacting with an inorganic compound or an organic compound can improve the adhesion and adhesion of the thermosetting protective film forming film to the adherend. In addition, by using the coupling agent (E), the water resistance of the cured product (protective film) of the thin film for forming a thermosetting protective film can be improved without impairing the heat resistance.

偶合劑(E)較佳係具有能與聚合體成分(A)、熱硬化性成分(B)等所具有官能基產生反應之官能基的化合物,更佳係矽烷偶合劑。 較佳的上述矽烷偶合劑係可舉例如:3-環氧丙氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-環氧丙氧基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、2-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-(2-胺基乙基胺基)丙基甲基二乙氧基矽烷、3-(苯基胺基)丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-苯胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-脲丙基三乙氧基矽烷、3-巰丙基三甲氧基矽烷、3-巰丙基甲基二甲氧基矽烷、雙(3-三乙氧基矽烷丙基)四磺胺、甲基三甲氧基矽烷、甲基三乙氧基矽烷、乙烯三甲氧基矽烷、乙烯三乙醯氧基矽烷、咪唑矽烷等。The coupling agent (E) is preferably a compound having a functional group capable of reacting with the functional groups of the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component (B), more preferably a silane coupling agent. Preferred above-mentioned silane coupling agents can be for example: 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyl Propyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxymethyldiethoxysilane, 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxy Propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-(2-aminoethylamino)propyl Methyldiethoxysilane, 3-(phenylamino)propyltrimethoxysilane, 3-anilinopropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-ureapropyltriethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropane Trimethoxysilane, 3-mercaptopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, bis(3-triethoxysilylpropyl) tetrasulfonamide, methyltrimethoxysilane, methyltriethoxysilane, ethylene Trimethoxysilane, ethylene triacetyloxysilane, imidazole silane, etc.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的偶合劑(E),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The coupling agent (E) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio The system can be selected arbitrarily.

使用偶合劑(E)的情況,組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,偶合劑(E)的含有量,相對於聚合體成分(A)與熱硬化性成分(B)的總含有量100質量份,較佳係0.03~20質量份、更佳係0.05~10質量份、特佳係0.1~5質量份。藉由偶合劑(E)的上述含有量達上述下限值以上,便提升填充材(D)對樹脂的分散性、提升熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜與被黏物間之接著性等,可使由使用偶合劑(E)造成的效果更加明顯。又,藉由偶合劑(E)的上述含有量在上述上限值以下,更加抑制發生逸氣情形。In the case of using the coupling agent (E), in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the content of the coupling agent (E) is relative to the polymer component (A) and the thermosetting component ( The total content of B) is 100 parts by mass, preferably 0.03 to 20 parts by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10 parts by mass, and most preferably 0.1 to 5 parts by mass. When the above-mentioned content of the coupling agent (E) is more than the above-mentioned lower limit value, the dispersibility of the filler (D) to the resin is improved, the adhesiveness between the film for forming a thermosetting protective film and the adherend is improved, etc., The effect resulting from the use of the coupling agent (E) can be made more pronounced. Moreover, when the said content of a coupling agent (E) is below the said upper limit, generation|occurrence|production of outgassing is further suppressed.

[交聯劑(F)] 當聚合體成分(A)係使用上述丙烯酸系樹脂等具有能與其他化合物鍵結之乙烯基、(甲基)丙烯醯基、胺基、羥基、羧基、異氰酸酯基等官能基者的情況,組成物(III-1)與熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有交聯劑(F)。交聯劑(F)係供使聚合體成分(A)中的上述官能基與其他化合物鍵結進行交聯用的成分,藉由依此進行交聯,便可調節熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的初期接著力與凝聚力。[Crosslinking agent (F)] When the polymer component (A) uses the above-mentioned acrylic resin or the like that has functional groups such as vinyl groups, (meth)acryl groups, amine groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and isocyanate groups that can bond with other compounds, the composition The substance (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may also contain a crosslinking agent (F). The cross-linking agent (F) is a component for cross-linking the above-mentioned functional group in the polymer component (A) to bond with other compounds, and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film can be adjusted by cross-linking accordingly. initial adhesion and cohesion.

交聯劑(F)係可舉例如:有機多元異氰酸酯化合物、有機多元亞胺化合物、金屬螯合系交聯劑(具金屬螯合構造的交聯劑)、氮丙啶系交聯劑(具吖丙啶基的交聯劑)等。The crosslinking agent (F) can be exemplified for example: organic polyvalent isocyanate compound, organic polyimine compound, metal chelate crosslinking agent (crosslinking agent with metal chelate structure), aziridine crosslinking agent (with Aziridine-based cross-linking agent), etc.

上述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物係可舉例如:芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物及脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物(以下將這些化合物統稱為「芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等」);上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等的三聚體、異三聚氰酸酯體及加成體;由上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物等與多元醇化合物進行反應獲得的末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物等。上述「加成體」係指由上述芳香族多元異氰酸酯化合物、脂肪族多元異氰酸酯化合物或脂環族多元異氰酸酯化合物,與乙二醇、丙二醇、新戊二醇、三羥甲基丙烷或蓖麻油等含低分子活性氫化合物的反應產物。上述加成體之例係可列舉如後述的三羥甲基丙烷之二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯加成物等。又,所謂「末端異氰酸酯胺甲酸乙酯預聚物」係如前所說明。The above-mentioned organic polyvalent isocyanate compounds include, for example: aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, aliphatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, and alicyclic polyvalent isocyanate compounds (hereinafter these compounds are collectively referred to as "aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc."); the above-mentioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds Trimers, isocyanurates, and adducts of compounds, etc.; terminal isocyanate urethane prepolymers obtained by reacting the above-mentioned aromatic polyvalent isocyanate compounds, etc., with polyol compounds, etc. The above-mentioned "addition body" refers to the above-mentioned aromatic polyisocyanate compound, aliphatic polyisocyanate compound or alicyclic polyisocyanate compound, and ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, neopentyl glycol, trimethylolpropane or castor oil, etc. Reaction products containing low molecular weight active hydrogen compounds. Examples of the above-mentioned adducts include trimethylolpropane-diisocyanate xylylene adducts, which will be described later, and the like. Also, the "isocyanate-terminated urethane prepolymer" is as described above.

上述有機多元異氰酸酯化合物更具體係可舉例如:2,4-二異氰酸甲苯酯;2,6-二異氰酸甲苯酯;1,3-二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯;1,4-二甲苯二異氰酸酯;二苯甲烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯;二苯甲烷-2,4'-二異氰酸酯;3-甲基二苯甲烷二異氰酸酯;六亞甲基二異氰酸酯;異佛爾酮二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-4,4'-二異氰酸酯;二環己基甲烷-2,4'-二異氰酸酯;在三羥甲基丙烷等的多元醇之所有或部分羥基,加成二異氰酸甲苯酯、六亞甲基二異氰酸酯及二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯中之任1種或2種以上的化合物;離胺酸二異氰酸酯等。The above-mentioned organic polyvalent isocyanate compounds can be more systematically for example: 2,4-cresyl diisocyanate; 2,6-cresyl diisocyanate; 1,3-xylylene diisocyanate; 1, 4-Xylene diisocyanate; Diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; Diphenylmethane-2,4'-diisocyanate; 3-Methyldiphenylmethane diisocyanate; Hexamethylene diisocyanate; Alone diisocyanate; dicyclohexylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate; Compounds of any one or two or more of cresyl isocyanate, hexamethylene diisocyanate, and xylylene diisocyanate; lysine diisocyanate, etc.

上述有機多元亞胺化合物係可舉例如:N,N'-二苯甲烷-4,4'-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)、三羥甲基丙烷-三-β-吖丙啶基丙酸酯、四羥甲基甲烷-三-β-吖丙啶基丙酸酯、N,N'-甲苯-2,4-雙(1-氮丙啶羧醯胺)三伸乙基三聚氰胺等。The above-mentioned organic polyimine compounds can be, for example: N,N'-diphenylmethane-4,4'-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide), trimethylolpropane-tri-β-aziridine N,N'-toluene-2,4-bis(1-aziridinecarboxamide)triethylenemelamine Wait.

當交聯劑(F)係使用有機多元異氰酸酯化合物的情況,聚合體成分(A)較佳係使用含羥基聚合體。當交聯劑(F)具有異氰酸酯基,且聚合體成分(A)具有羥基的情況,藉由交聯劑(F)與聚合體成分(A)的反應,便可簡便地在熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中導入交聯構造。When the crosslinking agent (F) is an organic polyvalent isocyanate compound, the polymer component (A) is preferably a hydroxyl-containing polymer. When the cross-linking agent (F) has an isocyanate group and the polymer component (A) has a hydroxyl group, the reaction between the cross-linking agent (F) and the polymer component (A) can easily protect A crosslinked structure is introduced into the film for film formation.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的交聯劑(F),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The crosslinking agent (F) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind, or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more kinds, the combination thereof and The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用交聯劑(F)的情況,組成物(III-1)中的交聯劑(F)含有量,相對於聚合體成分(A)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.01~20質量份、更佳係0.1~10質量份、特佳係0.5~5質量份。藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含有量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用交聯劑(F)所造成效果更加明顯。又,藉由交聯劑(F)的上述含有量在上述上限值以下,便可抑制交聯劑(F)過度使用。When using the crosslinking agent (F), the content of the crosslinking agent (F) in the composition (III-1) is preferably 0.01 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the polymer component (A). 0.1-10 parts by mass, more preferably 0.1-10 parts by mass, and especially 0.5-5 parts by mass. When the said content of a crosslinking agent (F) is more than the said lower limit, the effect by using a crosslinking agent (F) can be made more remarkable. Moreover, when the said content of a crosslinking agent (F) is below the said upper limit, excessive use of a crosslinking agent (F) can be suppressed.

[能量線硬化性樹脂(G)] 組成物(III-1)亦可含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)。藉由熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G),便可利用能量線照射使特性變化。[energy ray curable resin (G)] The composition (III-1) may also contain an energy ray curable resin (G). When the film for forming a thermosetting protective film contains the energy ray curable resin (G), the properties can be changed by energy ray irradiation.

能量線硬化性樹脂(G)係由能量線硬化性化合物進行聚合(硬化)而獲得。 上述能量線硬化性化合物係可列舉1分子內具有至少1個聚合性雙鍵的化合物,較佳係具(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物。The energy ray curable resin (G) is obtained by polymerizing (curing) an energy ray curable compound. The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound includes a compound having at least one polymerizable double bond in one molecule, preferably an acrylate compound having a (meth)acryl group.

上述丙烯酸酯系化合物係可舉例如:三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、四羥甲基甲烷四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇單羥五[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇六[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,4-丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]等含鏈狀脂肪族骨架之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;二(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等含環狀脂肪族骨架之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;聚乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]等聚烷二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯;寡聚酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯;胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物;環氧改質(甲基)丙烯酸酯;上述聚烷二醇(甲基)丙烯酸酯以外的聚醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯;衣康酸寡聚物等。The above-mentioned acrylate-based compounds can be, for example: trimethylolpropane tri[(meth)acrylate], tetramethylolmethane tetra[(meth)acrylate], neopentylthritol tri[(meth)acrylate] Acrylates], Neopentylthritol Tetra[(meth)acrylate], Dineopentylthritol Monohydroxypenta[(meth)acrylate], Dineopentylthritol Hexa[(meth)acrylate], 1,4-butanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-hexanediol di[(meth)acrylate] and other (meth)acrylates containing chain aliphatic skeleton; di( Cyclic aliphatic skeleton-containing (meth)acrylates such as dicyclopentanyl methacrylate; polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylates such as polyethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate]; oligomer Ester (meth)acrylate; Urethane (meth)acrylate oligomer; Epoxy modified (meth)acrylate; Polyether (meth)acrylate other than the above-mentioned polyalkylene glycol (meth)acrylate Base) acrylates; itaconic acid oligomers, etc.

上述能量線硬化性化合物的重量平均分子量較佳係100~30000、更佳係300~10000。The weight average molecular weight of the energy ray-curable compound is preferably 100 to 30,000, more preferably 300 to 10,000.

聚合時所使用的上述能量線硬化性化合物,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound used in the polymerization may be only one kind, or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more kinds, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(III-1)所含有的能量線硬化性樹脂(G)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The energy ray curable resin (G) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and if there are two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

當使用能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的情況,組成物(III-1)的能量線硬化性樹脂(G)含有量,較佳係1~95質量%、更佳係5~90質量%、特佳係10~85質量%。When the energy ray-curable resin (G) is used, the content of the energy ray-curable resin (G) in the composition (III-1) is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 5 to 90% by mass, 10~85% by mass of extra-fine.

[光聚合起始劑(H)] 當組成物(III-1)係含有能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的情況,為能有效率地進行能量線硬化性樹脂(G)的聚合反應,亦可含有光聚合起始劑(H)。[Photopolymerization initiator (H)] When the composition (III-1) contains the energy ray curable resin (G), in order to efficiently carry out the polymerization reaction of the energy ray curable resin (G), it may also contain a photopolymerization initiator (H) .

組成物(III-1)中的光聚合起始劑(H)係可舉例如:苯偶姻、苯偶姻甲醚、苯偶姻乙醚、苯偶姻異丙醚、苯偶姻異丁醚、苯偶姻安息香酸、苯偶姻安息香酸甲酯、苯偶姻二甲縮酮等苯偶姻化合物;苯乙酮、2-羥-2-甲基-1-苯基-丙烷-1-酮、2,2-二甲氧基-1,2-二苯基乙烷-1-酮等苯乙酮化合物;雙(2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基)苯基氧化膦、2,4,6-三甲基苯甲醯基二苯基氧化膦等醯化氧化膦化合物;苄基苯硫醚、單硫化四甲胺硫甲醯等硫醚化合物;1-羥環己基苯酮等α-酮醇化合物;偶氮雙異丁腈等偶氮化合物;二茂鈦等二茂鈦化合物;氧硫𠮿

Figure 02_image001
等氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
化合物;過氧化合物;二乙醯等二酮化合物;苄基;二苄基;二苯基酮;2,4-二乙基氧硫𠮿
Figure 02_image001
;1,2-二苯甲烷;2-羥-2-甲基-1-[4-(1-甲基乙烯基)苯基]丙酮;2-氯蒽醌等。 再者,上述光聚合起始劑尚可舉例如:1-氯蒽醌等醌化合物;胺等光增感劑等。The photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) can include, for example: benzoin, benzoin methyl ether, benzoin ethyl ether, benzoin isopropyl ether, benzoin isobutyl ether , benzoin benzoic acid, benzoin benzoic acid methyl ester, benzoin dimethyl ketal and other benzoin compounds; acetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propane-1- Acetophenone compounds such as ketones and 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one; bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)phenylphosphine oxide , 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl diphenylphosphine oxide and other acylated phosphine oxide compounds; benzyl phenyl sulfide, tetramethylamine thioformyl monosulfide and other sulfide compounds; 1-hydroxycyclohexyl α-ketol compounds such as benzophenone; azo compounds such as azobisisobutyronitrile; titanocene compounds such as titanocene; oxygen sulfur 𠮿
Figure 02_image001
isosulfur
Figure 02_image001
Compounds; peroxy compounds; diketone compounds such as diacetyl; benzyl; dibenzyl; diphenyl ketone; 2,4-diethyloxysulfurium
Figure 02_image001
; 1,2-diphenylmethane; 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-[4-(1-methylvinyl)phenyl] acetone; 2-chloroanthraquinone, etc. Furthermore, the above-mentioned photopolymerization initiator may still include, for example: quinone compounds such as 1-chloroanthraquinone; photosensitizers such as amines; and the like.

組成物(III-1)所含有的光聚合起始劑(H)係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The photopolymerization initiator (H) contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

當使用光聚合起始劑(H)的情況,組成物(III-1)中的光聚合起始劑(H)含有量,相對於能量線硬化性樹脂(G)含有量100質量份,較佳係0.1~20質量份、更佳係1~10質量份、特佳係2~5質量份。When the photopolymerization initiator (H) is used, the content of the photopolymerization initiator (H) in the composition (III-1) is relatively small relative to 100 parts by mass of the content of the energy ray-curable resin (G). Best is 0.1-20 parts by mass, more preferred is 1-10 parts by mass, and extra-preferable is 2-5 parts by mass.

[著色劑(I)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜亦可含有著色劑(I)。 著色劑(I)係可舉例如:無機系顏料、有機系顏料、有機系染料等公知物。[Color (I)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a colorant (I). As a coloring agent (I), known things, such as an inorganic pigment, an organic pigment, and an organic dye, are mentioned, for example.

上述有機系顏料及有機系染料係可舉例如:銨(aminium)系色素、花青(cyanine)系色素、部花青素(merocyanine)系色素、克酮酸(croconium)系色素、方酸菁(squarylium)系色素、甘菊環鎓(azulenium)系色素、聚次甲基(polymethine)系色素、萘醌(naphthoquinone)系色素、吡喃(pyrylium)系色素、酞青素(phthalocyanine)系色素、萘酞青素(naphthalocyanine)系色素、萘內醯亞胺(naphtholactam)系色素、偶氮(azo)系色素、縮合偶氮系色素、靛藍(indigo)系色素、芘酮(perinone)系色素、苝(Perylene)系色素、雙噁嗪(dioxazine)系色素、喹吖酮(quinacridone)系色素、異吲哚啉酮(isoindolinone)系色素、喹啉黃(quinophthalone)系色素、吡咯(pyrrole)系色素、硫靛藍(thioindigo)系色素、金屬錯合物系色素(金屬錯鹽染料)、二硫酚(dithiol)金屬錯合物系色素、吲哚酚(indole phenol)系色素、三烯丙基甲烷(triallyl methane)系色素、蒽醌(anthraquinone)系色素、雙噁嗪系色素、萘酚(naphthol)系色素、甲亞胺(azomethine)系色素、苯并咪唑酮(benzimidazolone)系色素、皮蒽酮(pyranthrone)系色素及士林(threne)系色素等。Examples of the above-mentioned organic pigments and organic dyes include ammonium pigments, cyanine pigments, merocyanine pigments, croconium pigments, and squarylium pigments. (squarylium)-based pigments, azulenium-based pigments, polymethine-based pigments, naphthoquinone-based pigments, pyrylium-based pigments, phthalocyanine-based pigments, naphthalene Phthalocyanine dyes, naphthalactam dyes, azo dyes, condensed azo dyes, indigo dyes, perinone dyes, perylene (Perylene)-based pigments, dioxazine-based pigments, quinacridone-based pigments, isoindolinone-based pigments, quinophthalone-based pigments, and pyrrole-based pigments , thioindigo pigments, metal complex pigments (metal complex salt dyes), dithiol metal complex pigments, indole phenol pigments, triallyl methane Triallyl methane-based pigments, anthraquinone-based pigments, dioxazine-based pigments, naphthol-based pigments, azomethine-based pigments, benzimidazolone-based pigments, pyranthracene Ketone (pyranthrone) pigments and shrene (threne) pigments, etc.

上述無機系顏料係可舉例如:碳黑、鈷系色素、鐵系色素、鉻系色素、鈦系色素、釩系色素、鋯系色素、鉬系色素、釕系色素、鉑系色素、ITO(氧化銦錫)系色素、ATO(氧化銻錫)系色素等。Examples of the above-mentioned inorganic pigments include carbon black, cobalt-based pigments, iron-based pigments, chromium-based pigments, titanium-based pigments, vanadium-based pigments, zirconium-based pigments, molybdenum-based pigments, ruthenium-based pigments, platinum-based pigments, ITO ( Indium tin oxide) based pigments, ATO (antimony tin oxide) based pigments, etc.

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的著色劑(I),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The coloring agent (I) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one kind or two or more kinds, and if there are two or more kinds, the combination and ratio thereof The system can be chosen arbitrarily.

當使用著色劑(I)的情況,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含有量係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可。例如藉由調整熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含有量而調整保護膜的光穿透性,便可調整對保護膜施行雷射刻印時的刻印檢視性。又,藉由調整熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含有量,亦可提升保護膜的設計性、不易看到半導體晶圓背面的研削痕等。若考慮此點,在組成物(III-1)中,著色劑(I)含有量相對於溶劑以外所有成分總含有量的比例(即,熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的著色劑(I)含有量),較佳係0.1~10質量%、更佳係0.1~7.5質量%、特佳係0.1~5質量%。藉由著色劑(I)的上述含有量達上述下限值以上,便可使由使用著色劑(I)所造成效果更加明顯。又,藉由著色劑(I)的上述含有量在上述上限值以下,便抑制熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的光穿透性的過度降低。In the case of using the colorant (I), the content of the colorant (I) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. For example, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) in the thermosetting protective film-forming film to adjust the light transmittance of the protective film, marking visibility when laser marking is performed on the protective film can be adjusted. Moreover, by adjusting the content of the coloring agent (I) in the film for forming a thermosetting protective film, the designability of the protective film can be improved, and grinding marks on the back surface of the semiconductor wafer can be made less visible. Considering this point, in the composition (III-1), the ratio of the content of the colorant (I) to the total content of all components other than the solvent (that is, the colorant (I) of the film for forming a thermosetting protective film content), preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 7.5% by mass, and most preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass. When the said content of a coloring agent (I) is more than the said lower limit, the effect by using a coloring agent (I) can be made more remarkable. Moreover, when the said content of a coloring agent (I) is below the said upper limit, the excessive fall of the light transmittance of the film for thermosetting protective film formation is suppressed.

[通用添加劑(J)] 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,亦可含有通用添加劑(J)。 通用添加劑(J)係可為公知物,可配合目的再行任意選擇,並無特別的限定,、較佳係可舉例如:可塑劑、抗靜電劑、抗氧化劑、吸氣(gettering)劑等。[General additive (J)] The composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may contain a general-purpose additive (J) within the range not to impair the effect of the present invention. General-purpose additives (J) can be known, and can be selected arbitrarily according to the purpose, and are not particularly limited. Preferred examples include: plasticizers, antistatic agents, antioxidants, gettering agents, etc. .

組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的通用添加劑(J),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。 組成物(III-1)及熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的通用添加劑(J)含有量,並無特別的限定,只要配合目的再行適當選擇便可。The general-purpose additive (J) contained in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film may be only one type, or may be two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio The system can be chosen arbitrarily. The content of the general-purpose additive (J) in the composition (III-1) and the film for forming a thermosetting protective film is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately selected according to the purpose.

[溶劑] 組成物(III-1)以進一步含有溶劑為佳。含有溶劑的組成物(III-1)的處置性呈良好。 上述溶劑並無特別的限定,較佳係可舉例如:甲苯、二甲苯等烴類;甲醇、乙醇、2-丙醇、異丁基醇(2-甲基丙烷-1-醇)、1-丁醇等醇類;醋酸乙酯等酯類;丙酮、甲乙酮等酮類;四氫呋喃等醚類;二甲基甲醯胺、N-甲基吡咯啶酮等醯胺類(具醯胺鍵的化合物)等。 組成物(III-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。[solvent] The composition (III-1) preferably further contains a solvent. The solvent-containing composition (III-1) showed good handling properties. The above-mentioned solvents are not particularly limited, and preferred systems can include, for example: hydrocarbons such as toluene and xylene; methanol, ethanol, 2-propanol, isobutyl alcohol (2-methylpropan-1-ol), 1- Alcohols such as butanol; Esters such as ethyl acetate; Ketones such as acetone and methyl ethyl ketone; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran; Amides such as dimethylformamide and N-methylpyrrolidone (compounds with amide bonds) )Wait. The solvent system contained in the composition (III-1) may be only one type, or may be two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(III-1)所含有的溶劑,就從使組成物(III-1)中的含有成分能更均勻混合的觀點,較佳係甲乙酮等。The solvent contained in the composition (III-1) is preferably methyl ethyl ketone or the like from the viewpoint of more uniform mixing of the components contained in the composition (III-1).

<<熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(III-1)等熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物,係藉由摻合構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與除溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將該摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Method for producing thermosetting protective film forming composition>> A composition for forming a thermosetting protective film such as composition (III-1) can be obtained by blending the respective components constituting it. The order of addition of the respective components is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any blending ingredient other than the solvent, and then the blended ingredient can be used after pre-diluted, or it can be in a state where no blending ingredient other than the solvent is pre-diluted Next, the solvent is mixed with these blending ingredients. When blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, for example: a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing by using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Appropriately select among other known methods. The temperature and time during the addition and mixing of each component are not specifically limited on the premise that the components will not deteriorate, as long as they are properly adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

○能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,可列舉含有能量線硬化性成分(a)者,較佳係含有能量線硬化性成分(a)與填充材。 能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中,能量線硬化性成分(a)以未硬化為佳,較佳係具有黏著性、更佳係未硬化且具有黏著性。此處所謂「能量線」與「能量線硬化性」係同前所說明。○Films for forming energy ray curable protective films The thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film includes those containing the energy ray curable component (a), preferably containing the energy ray curable component (a) and a filler. In the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film, the energy ray curable component (a) is preferably uncured, preferably has adhesiveness, more preferably is uncured and has adhesiveness. The so-called "energy line" and "energy line hardening" here are the same as the previous explanation.

將能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜貼附於半導體晶圓的背面之後,使硬化時的硬化條件係在使硬化物成為能充分發揮機能之程度的硬化度前提下,並無特別的限定,只要配合能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的種類再行適當選擇便可。 例如能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜進行硬化時,能量線的照度較佳係120~280mW/cm2 。而,上述硬化時,能量線的光通量較佳係100~1000mJ/cm2After attaching the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film to the back surface of the semiconductor wafer, the curing conditions for curing are not particularly limited on the premise that the cured product has a degree of curing sufficient to fully perform its functions. What is necessary is just to select suitably according to the kind of thin film for energy ray curable protective film formation. For example, when the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film is cured, the illuminance of the energy ray is preferably 120 to 280 mW/cm 2 . However, in the above hardening, the luminous flux of the energy line is preferably 100 to 1000 mJ/cm 2 .

<能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(IV-1)> 較佳的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物可列舉例如:含有上述能量線硬化性成分(a)的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(IV-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱為「組成物(IV-1)」)等。<Energy ray curable protective film forming composition (IV-1)> A preferable composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film includes, for example, the composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film (IV-1) containing the aforementioned energy ray curable component (a) (also abbreviated as "composition (IV-1)") and the like.

[能量線硬化性成分(a)] 能量線硬化性成分(a)係藉由能量線照射會硬化的成分,亦屬於供對能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜賦予造膜性、可撓性等,且經硬化後形成硬質保護膜用的成分。 能量線硬化性成分(a)可列舉例如:具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1);以及具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)。上述聚合體(a1)係可至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯、亦可並未被交聯。[energy ray hardening ingredient (a)] The energy ray curable component (a) is a component that can be cured by energy ray irradiation, and is also used to impart film-forming properties, flexibility, etc. to the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film, and to form a hard protective film after curing ingredients used. The energy ray curable component (a) includes, for example: a polymer (a1) having an energy ray curable group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000; and a compound (a2) having an energy ray curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000. The above-mentioned polymer (a1) may be at least partially cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, or may not be cross-linked.

(具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1)) 具有能量線硬化性基且重量平均分子量80000~2000000的聚合體(a1)可列舉例如:由具有能與其他化合物所具有基產生反應之官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11),與具有會與上述官能基產生反應之基及具有能量線硬化性雙鍵等能量線硬化性基的能量線硬化性化合物(a12),進行反應而生成的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)。(Polymer (a1) having an energy ray hardening group and a weight average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000) Examples of the polymer (a1) having an energy ray hardening group and a weight-average molecular weight of 80,000 to 2,000,000 include an acrylic polymer (a11) having a functional group capable of reacting with groups in other compounds, and having a An acrylic resin (a1-1) produced by reacting an energy ray-curable compound (a12) having an energy ray-curable group such as an energy ray-curable double bond with a reactive group of the above-mentioned functional group.

能與其他化合物所具有之基產生反應的上述官能基,係可舉例如:羥基、羧基、胺基、取代胺基(胺基的1個或2個氫原子被氫原子以外之基所取代的基)、環氧基等。但,就從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片等的電路糟腐蝕之觀點,上述官能基較佳係羧基以外的基。 這些之中,上述官能基較佳係羥基。The above-mentioned functional groups that can react with groups possessed by other compounds include, for example, hydroxyl, carboxyl, amino, and substituted amino groups (one or two hydrogen atoms of the amino group are replaced by groups other than hydrogen atoms) group), epoxy group, etc. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of semiconductor wafers, semiconductor wafers, and the like, the above-mentioned functional groups are preferably groups other than carboxyl groups. Among these, the above-mentioned functional group is preferably a hydroxyl group.

・具有官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11) 具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)係可舉例如:由具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體、與未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體進行共聚合而形成者,這些單體之外,尚亦可由丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)進行共聚合者。 再者,上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)係可為無規共聚物、亦可為嵌段共聚物,關於聚合方法亦可採用公知方法。・Acrylic polymer with functional groups (a11) The acrylic polymer (a11) having the above-mentioned functional group can be, for example, one formed by copolymerization of an acrylic monomer having the above-mentioned functional group and an acrylic monomer not having the above-mentioned functional group. In addition, it is also possible to copolymerize monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers). In addition, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) may be a random copolymer or a block copolymer, and a known method may be used for the polymerization method.

具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:含羥基單體、含羧基單體、含胺基單體、取代含胺基單體、含環氧基單體等。The acrylic monomers having the above functional groups include, for example, hydroxyl-containing monomers, carboxyl-containing monomers, amine-containing monomers, substituted amino-containing monomers, epoxy-containing monomers, and the like.

上述含羥基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羥烷基酯;乙烯醇、烯丙醇等非(甲基)丙烯酸系不飽和醇(未具(甲基)丙烯醯基骨架的不飽和醇)等。The above-mentioned hydroxyl-containing monomer system can be exemplified: (meth) hydroxymethyl acrylate, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxyethyl, (meth) acrylate-2-hydroxypropyl, (meth) acrylate-3 -Hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate and other hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates ; Non-(meth)acrylic unsaturated alcohols (unsaturated alcohols without a (meth)acryl skeleton) such as vinyl alcohol and allyl alcohol.

上述含羧基單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸、巴豆酸等乙烯性不飽和單羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的單羧酸);反丁烯二酸、衣康酸、順丁烯二酸、檸康酸等乙烯性不飽和二羧酸(具乙烯性不飽和鍵的二羧酸);上述乙烯性不飽和二羧酸的酸酐;甲基丙烯酸-2-羧乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸羧烷基酯等等。The above-mentioned carboxyl group-containing monomer system can be exemplified for example: (meth)acrylic acid, crotonic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids (monocarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds); fumaric acid, itaconic acid, cis Butenedioic acid, citraconic acid and other ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids (dicarboxylic acids with ethylenically unsaturated bonds); anhydrides of the above-mentioned ethylenically unsaturated dicarboxylic acids; 2-carboxyethyl methacrylate, etc. Carboxyalkyl (meth)acrylate and the like.

上述具有官能基的丙烯酸系單體較佳係含羥基單體。The above-mentioned acrylic monomers having functional groups are preferably hydroxyl-containing monomers.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)、且具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The acrylic monomers constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) and having the above-mentioned functional groups may be only one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily. .

未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯( (甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯 )、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯( (甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯 )、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯( (甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯 )、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯( (甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯 )等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18之鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。The acrylic monomer system without the above-mentioned functional groups can be exemplified: methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, ( n-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, amyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylic acid Hexyl ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate , isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), ( Tridecyl Methacrylate, Myristyl (Meth)acrylate (Myristyl (Meth)acrylate), Pentadecyl (Meth)acrylate, Hexadecyl (Meth)acrylate Alkyl esters (palm (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. Alkyl (meth)acrylate with a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, etc.

再者,未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸甲氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙氧基乙酯等含烷氧烷基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯;含(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳酯等且具芳香族基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯;非交聯性(甲基)丙烯醯胺及其衍生物;(甲基)丙烯酸-N,N-二甲胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-N,N-二甲胺基丙酯等具非交聯性三級胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。Furthermore, acrylic monomers without the above-mentioned functional groups include, for example: methoxymethyl (meth)acrylate, methoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, ethoxymethyl (meth)acrylate (meth)acrylates containing alkoxyalkyl groups such as esters, ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylates, etc.; aryl (meth)acrylates containing phenyl (meth)acrylates, etc. and having aromatic groups ( Meth)acrylates; non-crosslinkable (meth)acrylamide and its derivatives; (meth)acrylate-N,N-dimethylaminoethyl ester, (meth)acrylate-N,N-di (Meth)acrylates having non-crosslinkable tertiary amino groups, such as methamidopropyl ester, etc.

構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)、且未具上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The acrylic monomers constituting the above acrylic polymer (a11) and not having the above functional groups may be only one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio can be arbitrary choose.

上述非丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:乙烯、降莰烯等烯烴;醋酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。 構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)的上述非丙烯酸系單體,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。Examples of the above-mentioned non-acrylic monomer system include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; styrene and the like. The above-mentioned non-acrylic monomer constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily.

上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)中,由具有上述官能基的丙烯酸系單體所衍生之構成單元量,相對於構成其之構成單元總量的比例(含有量),較佳係0.1~50質量%、更佳係1~40質量%、特佳係3~30質量%。藉由上述比例在此種範圍內,由上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)與上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)共聚合獲得的上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,能量線硬化性基的含有量便可輕易將保護膜的硬化程度調整於較佳範圍內。In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11), the ratio (content) of the constituent units derived from the acrylic monomer having the above-mentioned functional group to the total amount of constituent units constituting it is preferably 0.1 to 50 mass %, Better is 1~40% by mass, Extrabest is 3~30% by mass. With the above-mentioned ratio within such a range, in the above-mentioned acrylic resin (a1-1) obtained by copolymerization of the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) and the above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound (a12), the energy ray-curable group The content can easily adjust the hardening degree of the protective film in a better range.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11) constituting the above-mentioned acrylic resin (a1-1) may be only one type or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(IV-1)中,丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)含有量相對於溶劑除外之成分總含有量的比例(即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)含有量),較佳係1~70質量%、更佳係5~60質量%、特佳係10~50質量%。In the composition (IV-1), the ratio of the content of the acrylic resin (a1-1) to the total content of the components excluding the solvent (that is, the acrylic resin (a1-1) in the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film 1) content), preferably 1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, and most preferably 10 to 50% by mass.

・能量線硬化性化合物(a12) 上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)中,能與上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所具有官能基產生反應的基,較佳係具有從異氰酸酯基、環氧基及羧基所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上,更佳係上述基係具有異氰酸酯基。上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係例如當上述基具有異氰酸酯基的情況,此異氰酸酯基輕易與具有上述官能基為羥基之丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)的羥基反應。・Energy ray hardening compound (a12) In the energy ray-curable compound (a12), the group capable of reacting with the functional group of the acrylic polymer (a11) preferably has 1 selected from the group consisting of an isocyanate group, an epoxy group, and a carboxyl group. One or two or more, more preferably the above-mentioned group has an isocyanate group. The above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) is, for example, when the above-mentioned group has an isocyanate group, and the isocyanate group easily reacts with the hydroxyl group of the acrylic polymer (a11) having the above-mentioned functional group as a hydroxyl group.

上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)的1分子中之上述能量線硬化性基,較佳係具有1~5個、更佳係具有1~3個。The above-mentioned energy ray-curable group in 1 molecule of the above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) preferably has 1 to 5 pieces, and more preferably has 1 to 3 pieces.

上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係可舉例如:異氰酸-2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙酯、間異丙烯基-α,α-二甲苄基異氰酸酯、甲基丙烯醯基異氰酸酯、異氰酸烯丙酯、異氰酸-1,1-(雙丙烯醯氧基甲基)乙酯; 由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物與(甲基)丙烯酸羥乙酯反應,而獲得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物; 由二異氰酸酯化合物或聚異氰酸酯化合物、多元醇化合物、及(甲基)丙烯酸羥乙酯進行反應,而獲得的丙烯醯基單異氰酸酯化合物等。 這些之中,上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)較佳係異氰酸-2-甲基丙烯醯氧基乙酯。Examples of the energy ray-curing compound (a12) include: 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate, m-isopropenyl-α,α-dimethylbenzyl isocyanate, methacryl isocyanate , Allyl isocyanate, 1,1-(bisacryloxymethyl)ethyl isocyanate; Acryl monoisocyanate compounds obtained by reacting diisocyanate compounds or polyisocyanate compounds with hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate; Acryl monoisocyanate compounds obtained by reacting diisocyanate compounds or polyisocyanate compounds, polyol compounds, and hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Among these, the energy ray-curable compound (a12) is preferably 2-methacryloxyethyl isocyanate.

構成上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)的上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The aforementioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) constituting the aforementioned acrylic resin (a1-1) may be one type, or two or more types. In the case of two or more types, the combination and ratio thereof can be selected arbitrarily. .

上述丙烯酸系樹脂(a1-1)中,由上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)所衍生的能量線硬化性基的含有量,相對於由上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所衍生的上述官能基的含有量的比例,較佳係20~120莫耳%、更佳係35~100莫耳%、特佳係50~100莫耳%。藉由上述含有量的比例在此種範圍內,經硬化後的保護膜接著力變為更大。另外,當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係單官能基(上述基在1分子中僅具有1個)化合物的情況,上述含有量的比例上限值成為100莫耳%,但當上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)係多官能基(上述基在1分子中具有2個以上)化合物的情況,上述含有量的比例上限值便會超過100莫耳%。In the acrylic resin (a1-1), the content of the energy ray-curable group derived from the energy ray-curable compound (a12) relative to the functional group derived from the acrylic polymer (a11) The proportion of the content of the preferred is 20-120 mol%, more preferably 35-100 mol%, and the most preferred is 50-100 mol%. When the ratio of the above-mentioned content is within such a range, the adhesive force of the cured protective film becomes larger. In addition, when the above-mentioned energy ray-curable compound (a12) is a monofunctional compound (the above-mentioned group has only one in 1 molecule), the upper limit of the ratio of the above-mentioned content is 100 mol%, but when the above-mentioned energy When the line-curing compound (a12) is a polyfunctional compound (having two or more of the above-mentioned groups in one molecule), the upper limit of the above-mentioned content exceeds 100 mol%.

上述聚合體(a1)的重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳係100000~2000000、更佳係300000~1500000。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (a1) is preferably 100,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably 300,000 to 1,500,000.

當上述聚合體(a1)係至少其一部分利用交聯劑而被交聯的情況,上述聚合體(a1)係可並不屬於就構成上述丙烯酸系聚合體(a11)所說明的上述任一單體,且可以是由具有會與交聯劑反應之基的單體進行聚合,在會與上述交聯劑進行反應的基被交聯者,亦可以是在上述能量線硬化性化合物(a12)所衍生會與上述官能基產生反應的基進行交聯者。When the above-mentioned polymer (a1) is at least partly cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, the above-mentioned polymer (a1) may not belong to any of the above-mentioned units described for constituting the above-mentioned acrylic polymer (a11). body, and may be polymerized from a monomer having a group that reacts with the crosslinking agent, and the one that is crosslinked at the group that will react with the above crosslinking agent may be the above energy ray curable compound (a12) A group derivatized that reacts with the above-mentioned functional group to perform cross-linking.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述聚合體(a1),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned polymer (a1) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be only one type or two or more types, and in the case of two or more types, the combination The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

(具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)) 具能量線硬化性基且分子量100~80000的化合物(a2)中,上述能量線硬化性基可列舉含有能量線硬化性雙鍵的基,較佳可列舉:(甲基)丙烯醯基、乙烯基等。(Compound (a2) having an energy ray hardening group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000) In the compound (a2) having an energy ray curable group and a molecular weight of 100 to 80,000, the energy ray curable group includes a group containing an energy ray curable double bond, preferably (meth)acryl, ethylene Base etc.

上述化合物(a2)係在滿足上述條件前提下,並無特別的限定,可例如:具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物、具有能量線硬化性基的環氧樹脂、具有能量線硬化性基的酚樹脂等。The above-mentioned compound (a2) is not particularly limited as long as the above-mentioned conditions are met, for example: a low molecular weight compound with an energy ray curable group, an epoxy resin with an energy ray curable group, an epoxy resin with an energy ray curable group phenolic resin, etc.

上述化合物(a2)中,具有能量線硬化性基的低分子量化合物可列舉:多官能基的單體或寡聚物等,較佳係具有(甲基)丙烯醯基的丙烯酸酯系化合物。 上述丙烯酸酯系化合物係可舉例如:2-羥-3-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙基甲基丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、丙氧基化乙氧基化雙酚A二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基聚乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、乙氧基化雙酚A二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基二乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、9,9-雙[4-(2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙氧基)苯基]茀、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基聚丙氧基)苯基]丙烷、三環癸烷二甲醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,10-癸二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,6-己二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、1,9-壬二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、聚丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、聚伸丁二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三乙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2,2-雙[4-((甲基)丙烯氧基乙氧基)苯基]丙烷、新戊二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙氧基化聚丙二醇二[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、2-羥-1,3-二(甲基)丙烯氧基丙烷等雙官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 異三聚氰酸參[2-(甲基)丙烯氧基乙酯]、ε-己內酯改質異三聚氰酸參[2-(甲基)丙烯氧基乙酯]、乙氧基化甘油三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、三羥甲基丙烷三[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二(三羥甲基丙烷)四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、乙氧基化新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、新戊四醇四[(甲基)丙烯酸酯]、二新戊四醇聚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二新戊四醇六(甲基)丙烯酸酯等多官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯; 胺甲酸乙酯(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等多官能基(甲基)丙烯酸酯寡聚物等。Among the above compounds (a2), the low-molecular-weight compound having an energy-ray-curable group includes polyfunctional monomers or oligomers, and is preferably an acrylate compound having a (meth)acryl group. The above-mentioned acrylate compounds can be exemplified as: 2-hydroxy-3-(meth)acryloxypropyl methacrylate, polyethylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], propoxylated ethylene Oxylated bisphenol A bis[(meth)acrylate], 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxypolyethoxy)phenyl]propane, ethoxylated bisphenol A di [(meth)acrylate], 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxydiethoxy)phenyl]propane, 9,9-bis[4-(2-(methyl) Acryloxyethoxy)phenyl] terpene, 2,2-bis[4-((meth)acryloxypolypropoxy)phenyl]propane, tricyclodecane dimethanol di[(methyl) acrylate], 1,10-decanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,6-hexanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,9-nonanediol di[(meth)acrylate], 1,9-nonanediol di[(meth)acrylate] ) acrylate], dipropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], tripropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], polypropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], polybutylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], polybutylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate], base) acrylate], ethylene glycol bis[(meth)acrylate], diethylene glycol bis[(meth)acrylate], triethylene glycol bis[(meth)acrylate], 2,2 - Bis[4-((meth)propenyloxyethoxy)phenyl]propane, neopentyl glycol di[(meth)acrylate], ethoxylated polypropylene glycol di[(meth)acrylate ], 2-hydroxy-1,3-di(meth)acryloxypropane and other difunctional (meth)acrylates; Isocyanuric acid ginseng [2-(meth)acryloxyethyl], ε-caprolactone modified isocyanuric acid ginseng [2-(meth)acryloxyethyl], ethoxy Triglycerol tri[(meth)acrylate], Neopentylthritol tri[(meth)acrylate], Trimethylolpropane tri[(meth)acrylate], Di(trimethylolpropane) tetra [(meth)acrylates], ethoxylated neopentylthritol tetrakis[(meth)acrylates], neopentylthritol tetrakis[(meth)acrylates], dipenteoerythritol poly(meth)acrylates ) acrylate, diperythritol hexa(meth)acrylate and other multifunctional (meth)acrylates; Polyfunctional (meth)acrylate oligomers such as urethane (meth)acrylate oligomers, etc.

上述化合物(a2)中,具能量線硬化性基之環氧樹脂、具能量線硬化性基之酚樹脂,例如可使用日本專利「特開2013-194102號公報」中在段落0043等處所記載者。此種樹脂亦屬於後述構成熱硬化性成分的樹脂,在本發明中視為上述化合物(a2)。Among the above-mentioned compounds (a2), epoxy resins having energy ray curable groups and phenol resins having energy ray curable groups, for example, those described in paragraph 0043 of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-194102 can be used. . Such a resin also belongs to the resin constituting the thermosetting component described later, and is regarded as the above-mentioned compound (a2) in the present invention.

上述化合物(a2)的重量平均分子量較佳係100~30000、更佳係300~10000。The weight average molecular weight of the above compound (a2) is preferably 100-30000, more preferably 300-10000.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述化合物(a2),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The above-mentioned compound (a2) contained in the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be only one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more kinds, the combination thereof and The ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

[未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)] 組成物(IV-1)及能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的上述能量線硬化性成分(a)含有上述化合物(a2)的情況,以亦進一步含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)為佳。 上述聚合體(b)係可至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯,亦可未被交聯。[Polymer (b) without energy ray hardening group] When the energy ray curable component (a) of the composition (IV-1) and the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film contains the above compound (a2), it may further contain a polymer having no energy ray curable group (b) is preferred. The above-mentioned polymer (b) may be at least partially cross-linked by a cross-linking agent, or may not be cross-linked.

未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)係可舉例如:丙烯酸系聚合體、苯氧樹脂、胺甲酸乙酯樹脂、聚酯、橡膠系樹脂、丙烯酸胺甲酸乙酯樹脂等。 這些之中,上述聚合體(b)較佳係丙烯酸系聚合體(以下亦簡稱「丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)」)。Examples of the polymer (b) having no energy-ray-curable group include acrylic polymers, phenoxy resins, urethane resins, polyesters, rubber-based resins, and urethane acrylate resins. Among these, the above-mentioned polymer (b) is preferably an acrylic polymer (hereinafter also referred to as "acrylic polymer (b-1)").

丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)係可為公知物,例如:可為單1種丙烯酸系單體的單聚物,亦可為2種以上丙烯酸系單體的共聚物,亦可由1種或2種以上丙烯酸系單體、與1種或2種以上的丙烯酸系單體以外的單體(非丙烯酸系單體)的共聚物。The acrylic polymer (b-1) can be a known thing, for example: it can be a single polymer of a single acrylic monomer, or it can be a copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers, or it can be made of one or more A copolymer of two or more acrylic monomers and one or more monomers other than acrylic monomers (non-acrylic monomers).

構成丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的上述丙烯酸系單體,係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯、具環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯、含取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯等。此處,所謂「取代胺基」係如同前所說明。The above-mentioned acrylic monomers constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) are, for example, alkyl (meth)acrylates, (meth)acrylates with a ring skeleton, glycidyl-containing ( Meth)acrylate, hydroxyl group-containing (meth)acrylate, substituted amino group-containing (meth)acrylate, etc. Here, the so-called "substituted amino group" is as described above.

上述(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三級丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸戊酯、(甲基)丙烯酸己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸庚酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正辛酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異壬酯、(甲基)丙烯酸癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十一烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十二烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸月桂酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十三烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十四烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸肉荳蔻酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十五烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十六烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸棕櫚酯)、(甲基)丙烯酸十七烷基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸十八烷基酯((甲基)丙烯酸硬脂酯)等,構成烷基酯的烷基係碳數1~18之鏈狀構造的(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯等。The above-mentioned alkyl (meth)acrylates can be, for example: methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate Base) n-butyl acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, secondary butyl (meth)acrylate, tertiary butyl (meth)acrylate, pentyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate ester, heptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, n-octyl (meth)acrylate, n-nonyl (meth)acrylate, Isononyl (meth)acrylate, decyl (meth)acrylate, undecyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate (lauryl (meth)acrylate), (meth)acrylate base) tridecyl acrylate, myristyl (meth)acrylate (myristyl (meth)acrylate), pentadecyl (meth)acrylate, hexadecyl (meth)acrylate ester (palm (meth)acrylate), heptadecyl (meth)acrylate, octadecyl (meth)acrylate (stearyl (meth)acrylate), etc. Alkyl (meth)acrylate with a chain structure of 1 to 18 carbon atoms.

上述具環狀骨架的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸異莰酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烷基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸苄酯等(甲基)丙烯酸芳烷酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯基酯; (甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯氧基乙酯等(甲基)丙烯酸環烯氧基烷基酯等等。The above-mentioned (meth)acrylates having a cyclic skeleton can be, for example, cycloalkyl (meth)acrylates such as isobornyl (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentyl (meth)acrylate; Aralkyl (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate; Cycloalkenyl (meth)acrylate such as dicyclopentenyl (meth)acrylate; Dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate, etc., cycloalkenyloxyalkyl (meth)acrylate, etc., etc.

上述含有環氧丙基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸環氧丙酯等。 上述含有羥基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸羥甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-2-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-3-羥丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸-4-羥丁酯等。 上述含有取代胺基的(甲基)丙烯酸酯係可舉例如:(甲基)丙烯酸-N-甲胺基乙酯等。As for the (meth)acrylate containing a glycidyl group, glycidyl (meth)acrylate etc. are mentioned, for example. The above-mentioned (meth)acrylates containing hydroxyl groups can be, for example: methylol (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, (meth)acrylate Base) 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, etc. Examples of the (meth)acrylates containing a substituted amino group include N-methylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate.

構成丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的上述非丙烯酸系單體係可舉例如:乙烯、降莰烯等烯烴;醋酸乙烯酯;苯乙烯等。Examples of the non-acrylic monomer constituting the acrylic polymer (b-1) include olefins such as ethylene and norbornene; vinyl acetate; and styrene.

至少其中一部分利用交聯劑進行交聯後的上述未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),係可舉例如:由上述聚合體(b)中的反應性官能基與交聯劑產生反應後者。 上述反應性官能基係只要依照交聯劑的種類等再行適當選擇便可,並無特別的限定。例如當交聯劑係聚異氰酸酯化合物的情況,上述反應性官能基可列舉:羥基、羧基、胺基等,這些之中,較佳係與異氰酸酯基的反應性高之羥基。又,當交聯劑係環氧系化合物的情況,上述反應性官能基可列舉:羧基、胺基、醯胺基等,這些之中較佳係與環氧基的反應性高之羧基。但,就從防止半導體晶圓、半導體晶片的電路遭腐蝕之觀點,上述反應性官能基較佳係羧基以外的基。The above-mentioned polymer (b) without energy ray hardening group after at least a part of it is cross-linked by a cross-linking agent is, for example, produced by the reactive functional group in the above-mentioned polymer (b) and a cross-linking agent. React to the latter. The above-mentioned reactive functional group is not particularly limited as long as it is properly selected according to the type of crosslinking agent and the like. For example, when the crosslinking agent is a polyisocyanate compound, examples of the reactive functional groups include hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, and amino groups. Among these, hydroxyl groups with high reactivity with isocyanate groups are preferred. Also, when the crosslinking agent is an epoxy-based compound, examples of the reactive functional group include carboxyl, amine, and amide groups, among which carboxyl having high reactivity with epoxy is preferred. However, from the viewpoint of preventing corrosion of semiconductor wafers and circuits of semiconductor wafers, the above-mentioned reactive functional groups are preferably groups other than carboxyl groups.

上述具有反應性官能基的未具能量線硬化性基之聚合體(b),可列舉:由至少具有上述反應性官能基的單體進行聚合而獲得者。丙烯酸系聚合體(b-1)的情況,只要將就構成其的單體所列舉之上述丙烯酸系單體及非丙烯酸系單體中之任一者或雙方,使用為具有上述反應性官能基者便可。反應性官能基係具有羥基的上述聚合體(b),可列舉例如:由含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯進行聚合而獲得者,除此之外,尚亦可列舉由前所列舉的上述丙烯酸系單體或非丙烯酸系單體中,1個或2個以上氫原子被上述反應性官能基所取代形成的單體,進行聚合而獲得者。The aforementioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group without an energy ray curable group includes one obtained by polymerizing a monomer having at least the aforementioned reactive functional group. In the case of the acrylic polymer (b-1), any one or both of the above-mentioned acrylic monomers and non-acrylic monomers listed for the monomers constituting it are used as having the above-mentioned reactive functional group Those who can. The above-mentioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group having a hydroxyl group includes, for example, one obtained by polymerizing a hydroxyl-containing (meth)acrylate. In addition, the above-mentioned Among acrylic monomers or non-acrylic monomers, one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by the above-mentioned reactive functional groups, which are obtained by polymerization.

具有反應性官能基的上述聚合體(b)中,由具反應性官能基的單體所衍生構成單元的量,相對於構成具有反應性官能基的上述聚合體(b)的構成單元總量之比例(含有量),較佳係1~20質量%、更佳係2~10質量%。藉由上述比例在此種範圍內,上述聚合體(b)的交聯程度便可成為更佳範圍。In the above-mentioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group, the amount of constituent units derived from a monomer having a reactive functional group, relative to the total amount of constituent units constituting the above-mentioned polymer (b) having a reactive functional group The ratio (content) is preferably 1 to 20% by mass, more preferably 2 to 10% by mass. When the ratio is within such a range, the degree of crosslinking of the polymer (b) can be in a more preferable range.

未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的重量平均分子量(Mw),就從使組成物(IV-1)的造膜性更良好之觀點,較佳係10000~2000000、更佳係100000~1500000。此處所謂「重量平均分子量」係如前所說明。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group is preferably 10,000 to 2,000,000, more preferably 100000~1500000. The so-called "weight average molecular weight" here is as described above.

組成物(IV-1)與能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The composition (IV-1) and the polymer (b) which does not have an energy ray curable group contained in the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film may be only one type or two or more types. In the above cases, the combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(IV-1)可列舉:含有上述聚合體(a1)與上述化合物(a2)中任一者或雙方者。而,當組成物(IV-1)係含有上述化合物(a2)的情況,較佳係進一步亦含有未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b),此情況亦較佳進一步含有上述(a1)。又,組成物(IV-1)亦可未含有上述化合物(a2),而是上述聚合體(a1)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)均含有。The composition (IV-1) includes one or both of the above-mentioned polymer (a1) and the above-mentioned compound (a2). However, when the composition (IV-1) contains the above-mentioned compound (a2), it is preferable to further contain the polymer (b) not having an energy ray curable group. In this case, it is also preferable to further contain the above-mentioned (a1 ). In addition, the composition (IV-1) may not contain the above-mentioned compound (a2), but may contain both the above-mentioned polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) having no energy ray curable group.

當組成物(IV-1)係含有上述聚合體(a1)、上述化合物(a2)及未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的情況,組成物(IV-1)中,上述化合物(a2)的含有量,相對於上述聚合體(a1)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)的總含有量100質量份,較佳係10~400質量份、更佳係30~350質量份。When the composition (IV-1) contains the above-mentioned polymer (a1), the above-mentioned compound (a2) and the polymer (b) without an energy ray curable group, in the composition (IV-1), the above-mentioned compound The content of (a2) is preferably 10 to 400 parts by mass, more preferably 30 parts by mass based on 100 parts by mass of the total content of the polymer (a1) and the polymer (b) not having an energy ray hardening group. ~350 parts by mass.

組成物(IV-1)中,上述能量線硬化性成分(a)與未具能量線硬化性基之聚合體(b)的合計含有量,相對於溶劑以外成分的總含有量的比例(即,能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜中的上述能量線硬化性成分(a)與未具能量線硬化性基的聚合體(b)之合計含有量),較佳係5~90質量%、更佳係10~80質量%、特佳係20~70質量%。藉由能量線硬化性成分的含有量的上述比例設在此種範圍內,便可使能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的能量線硬化性更良好。In the composition (IV-1), the ratio of the total content of the energy ray-curable component (a) and the polymer (b) without an energy ray-curable group to the total content of the components other than the solvent (i.e. , the total content of the energy ray curable component (a) and the polymer (b) without energy ray curable group in the film for forming an energy ray curable protective film), preferably 5 to 90% by mass, Better is 10-80% by mass, and Extra-best is 20-70% by mass. When the above-mentioned ratio of the content of the energy ray curable component is within such a range, the energy ray curability of the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film can be further improved.

組成物(IV-1)係上述能量線硬化性成分以外,配合目的尚亦可含有從熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上。Composition (IV-1) is not only the above-mentioned energy ray curable components, but also can contain thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general additives for compounding purposes. Select 1 or 2 or more types in the composition group.

例如藉由使用上述含有能量線硬化性成分與熱硬化性成分的組成物(IV-1),便可提升所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜利用加熱對被黏物的接著力,且由此能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所形成保護膜的強度亦獲提升。 再者,藉由使用上述含有能量線硬化性成分及著色劑的組成物(IV-1),所形成的能量線硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,便可顯現出與前所說明熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)情況同樣的效果。For example, by using the above-mentioned composition (IV-1) containing an energy ray curable component and a thermosetting component, the adhesive force of the formed film for forming an energy ray curable protective film to an adherend by heating can be improved, In addition, the strength of the protective film formed by the thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film is also improved. Furthermore, by using the above-mentioned composition (IV-1) containing an energy ray curable component and a colorant, the formed thin film for forming an energy ray curable protective film can exhibit the same thermosetting protective film as described above. The same effect is obtained when the film for film formation contains the colorant (I).

組成物(IV-1)的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別可列舉與組成物(III-1)的熱硬化性成分(B)、填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、光聚合起始劑(H)、著色劑(I)及通用添加劑(J)相同物。The above-mentioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general additives of the composition (IV-1) are respectively exemplified by the thermosetting components of the composition (III-1). The same thing as the property component (B), the filler (D), the coupling agent (E), the crosslinking agent (F), the photopolymerization initiator (H), the colorant (I) and the general additive (J).

組成物(IV-1)中,上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑分別係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若倂用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。In the composition (IV-1), each of the above-mentioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants, and general additives may be used alone or in combination of two or more , if two or more cases are used, the combination and ratio can be chosen arbitrarily.

組成物(IV-1)的上述熱硬化性成分、填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、光聚合起始劑、著色劑及通用添加劑之含有量,係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可,並無特別的限定。The content of the above-mentioned thermosetting components, fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, photopolymerization initiators, colorants and general additives in the composition (IV-1) can be adjusted as long as it suits the purpose. There is no particular limitation.

組成物(IV-1)因為利用稀釋便可提升處置性,因而以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 組成物(IV-1)所含有的溶劑可列舉例如同上述組成物(III-1)的溶劑。 組成物(IV-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上。Composition (IV-1) preferably further contains a solvent because the handling property can be improved by dilution. The solvent contained in the composition (IV-1) includes, for example, the same solvents as those of the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent system contained in the composition (IV-1) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds.

<<能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(IV-1)等能量線硬化性保護膜形成用組成物係藉由摻合用於構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Manufacturing method of energy ray curable protective film forming composition>> The composition for forming an energy ray curable protective film such as the composition (IV-1) can be obtained by blending each component for constituting it. The order of addition of the respective components is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any blending ingredient other than the solvent, and then the blended ingredient can be used after pre-diluted, or it can be used without pre-diluted any blended ingredient other than the solvent. , the solvent is mixed with these blending ingredients. When blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, for example: a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing by using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Appropriately select among other known methods. The temperature and time during the addition and mixing of each component are not specifically limited on the premise that the components will not deteriorate, as long as they are properly adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

○非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜 上述非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜雖不會因硬化而呈現特性變化,但本發明中,在貼附於半導體晶圓的上述背面等目標地方之階段,視同已形成保護膜。○Films for forming non-hardening protective films The aforementioned non-curable protective film-forming thin film does not exhibit characteristic changes due to curing, but in the present invention, the protective film is considered to have been formed at the stage of attaching to the target place such as the above-mentioned back surface of the semiconductor wafer.

較佳的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜可列舉例如:含有熱可塑性樹脂者。As a preferable non-hardening protective film forming film, the thing containing a thermoplastic resin is mentioned, for example.

<非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(V-1)> 非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物係可舉例如:含有上述熱可塑性樹脂的非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(V-1)(本說明書中亦簡稱「組成物(V-1)」)等。<Non-hardening protective film forming composition (V-1)> Examples of the composition system for forming a non-curable protective film include the composition (V-1) for forming a non-curable protective film containing the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin (also referred to as "composition (V-1)" in this specification). Wait.

[熱可塑性樹脂] 上述熱可塑性樹脂並無特別的限定。 上述熱可塑性樹脂,更具體可列舉例如與作為上述組成物(III-1)的含有成分所列舉丙烯酸系樹脂、聚酯、聚氨酯、苯氧樹脂、聚丁烯、聚丁二烯、聚苯乙烯等非硬化性的樹脂為同樣者。[thermoplastic resin] The aforementioned thermoplastic resin is not particularly limited. More specifically, the above-mentioned thermoplastic resins include, for example, acrylic resins, polyesters, polyurethanes, phenoxy resins, polybutenes, polybutadienes, polystyrenes, etc. The same applies to non-hardening resins.

組成物(V-1)及非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜所含有的上述熱可塑性樹脂,係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上,若2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。The thermoplastic resin contained in the composition (V-1) and the film for forming a non-curable protective film may be one kind or two or more kinds. In the case of two or more kinds, the combination and the ratio thereof are Optional.

組成物(V-1)中,上述熱可塑性樹脂的含有量相對於溶劑以外成分的總含有量的比例(即,非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜的上述熱可塑性樹脂的含有量),較佳係5~90質量%,例如可為10~80質量%、及20~70質量%等中之任一者。In the composition (V-1), the ratio of the content of the thermoplastic resin to the total content of the components other than the solvent (that is, the content of the thermoplastic resin in the film for forming a non-curable protective film) is preferably It is 5-90 mass %, for example, may be any of 10-80 mass %, 20-70 mass %, etc.

組成物(V-1)係上述熱可塑性樹脂之外,配合目的尚亦可含有從填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑所構成群組中選擇1種或2種以上。Composition (V-1) is not only the above-mentioned thermoplastic resin, but also contains one or two or more kinds selected from the group consisting of filler, coupling agent, crosslinking agent, coloring agent and general additives.

例如藉由使用上述含有熱可塑性樹脂與著色劑的組成物(V-1),則所形成的非硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜,便可顯現出與前所說明當熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜含有著色劑(I)情況同樣的效果。For example, by using the above-mentioned composition (V-1) containing a thermoplastic resin and a coloring agent, the formed film for forming a non-hardening protective film can exhibit the same color as that for forming a thermosetting protective film as described above. The same effect is obtained when the film contains the colorant (I).

組成物(V-1)中的上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別可列舉與組成物(III-1)的填充材(D)、偶合劑(E)、交聯劑(F)、著色劑(I)及通用添加劑(J)為相同者。The above-mentioned fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants and general additives in the composition (V-1) can be respectively listed as fillers (D), coupling agents (E), The crosslinking agent (F), the colorant (I) and the general additive (J) are the same.

組成物(V-1)中,上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑,分別係可單獨使用1種、亦可併用2種以上,若倂用2種以上的情況,其組合與比率係可任意選擇。In the composition (V-1), the above-mentioned fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants, and general-purpose additives may be used alone or in combination of two or more. If two or more are used, Its combination and ratio can be selected arbitrarily.

組成物(V-1)中,上述填充材、偶合劑、交聯劑、著色劑及通用添加劑的含有量,係只要配合目的再行適當調整便可,並無特別的限定。In the composition (V-1), the contents of the above-mentioned fillers, coupling agents, crosslinking agents, colorants and general additives are not particularly limited as long as they can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.

組成物(V-1)係利用稀釋便可提升處置性,因而以進一步含有溶劑為佳。 組成物(V-1)所含有的溶劑可列舉例如同上述組成物(III-1)的溶劑。 組成物(V-1)所含有的溶劑係可僅為1種、亦可為2種以上。Since the composition (V-1) can improve handling property by dilution, it is preferable to further contain a solvent. The solvent contained in the composition (V-1) includes, for example, the same solvents as those of the above-mentioned composition (III-1). The solvent system contained in the composition (V-1) may be only one kind, or may be two or more kinds.

<<非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物之製造方法>> 組成物(V-1)等非硬化性保護膜形成用組成物係藉由摻合構成其的各成分便可獲得。 各成分摻合時的添加順序並無特別的限定,亦可2種以上的成分同時添加。 使用溶劑時,可將溶劑與溶劑以外的任一摻合成分進行混合,再將此摻合成分施行預稀釋後才使用,亦可在未將溶劑以外的任一摻合成分施行預稀釋狀態下,便將溶劑與這些摻合成分施行混合使用。 摻合時,將各成分施行混合的方法並無特別的限定,可從例如:使攪拌子或攪拌葉片等旋轉而進行混合的方法;使用混合機進行混合的方法;施加超音波進行混合的方法等公知方法中適當選擇。 各成分的添加及混合時的溫度與時間係在各摻合成分不會劣化前提下,並無特別的限定,只要適當調整便可,溫度較佳係15~30℃。<<Production method of non-hardening protective film forming composition>> Compositions for forming a non-curable protective film such as the composition (V-1) can be obtained by blending each component constituting it. The order of addition of the respective components is not particularly limited, and two or more components may be added simultaneously. When using a solvent, the solvent can be mixed with any blending ingredient other than the solvent, and then the blended ingredient can be used after pre-diluted, or it can be used without pre-diluted any blended ingredient other than the solvent. , the solvent is mixed with these blending ingredients. When blending, the method of mixing the components is not particularly limited, for example: a method of mixing by rotating a stirrer or a stirring blade; a method of mixing by using a mixer; a method of mixing by applying ultrasonic waves. Appropriately select among other known methods. The temperature and time during the addition and mixing of each component are not specifically limited on the premise that the blended components will not deteriorate, as long as they are properly adjusted, the temperature is preferably 15~30°C.

◎其他層 上述支撐片係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,在基材與黏著劑層之外,尚亦可包括上述中間層等其他層。 再者,上述保護膜形成用複合片係在不致損及本發明效果之範圍內,在基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜之外,尚亦可包括其他層,此情況的上述其他層係可為支撐片所包括的上述其他層,亦可配置成未直接接觸支撐片狀態。 上述其他層係可配合目的再行任意選擇,且種類並無特別的限定。◎Other layers The above-mentioned supporting sheet may also include other layers such as the above-mentioned intermediate layer in addition to the base material and the adhesive layer within the range that does not impair the effect of the present invention. Furthermore, the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film may include other layers in addition to the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film within the range that does not impair the effects of the present invention. The layer system can be the above-mentioned other layers included in the support sheet, and can also be configured in a state of not directly contacting the support sheet. The above-mentioned other layers can be selected arbitrarily according to the purpose, and the types are not particularly limited.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層係非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含有量100質量份,交聯劑的含有量係0.3~50質量份,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。One embodiment of the support sheet and the protective film-forming composite sheet includes, for example, an adhesive layer that is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned The acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent are contained in the adhesive layer in an amount of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, and the above-mentioned content of the first surface of the substrate is The maximum height roughness (Rz) is 0.01~8μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含有量100質量份,交聯劑的含有量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。One embodiment of the support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet includes, for example: the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned Acrylic polymer and cross-linking agent, in the adhesive layer, relative to the content of the above-mentioned acrylic polymer of 100 parts by mass, the content of the cross-linking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer system has The constituent units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates with 4 or more carbon atoms and the constituent units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers, and the above-mentioned maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01-8 μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含有量100質量份,交聯劑的含有量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,相對於構成單元總量,由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元的含有量係1~35質量%,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。One embodiment of the support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet includes, for example: the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least the above-mentioned Acrylic polymer and cross-linking agent, in the adhesive layer, relative to the content of the above-mentioned acrylic polymer of 100 parts by mass, the content of the cross-linking agent is 0.3 to 50 parts by mass, the above-mentioned acrylic polymer system has Constituent units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates with 4 or more carbon atoms and units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers. In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, relative to the total amount of constituent units, The content of the derived structural unit is 1 to 35% by mass, and the above-mentioned maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01 to 8 μm.

上述支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之一實施形態,可列舉例如:黏著劑層為非能量線硬化性,且黏著劑層含有至少具由(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元的上述丙烯酸系聚合體、與交聯劑,在黏著劑層中,相對於上述丙烯酸系聚合體的含有量100質量份,交聯劑的含有量係0.3~50質量份,上述丙烯酸系聚合體係具有由烷基碳數達4以上之(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯所衍生構成單元與由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元,在上述丙烯酸系聚合體中,相對於構成單元總量,由含羥基單體所衍生構成單元的含有量係1~35質量%,上述交聯劑係異氰酸酯系交聯劑,且基材第1面的上述最大高度粗糙度(Rz)係0.01~8μm。An example of an embodiment of the support sheet and protective film-forming composite sheet includes: the adhesive layer is non-energy ray curable, and the adhesive layer contains at least The acrylic polymer and the crosslinking agent are contained in the adhesive layer in an amount of 0.3 to 50 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the acrylic polymer, and the acrylic polymer system has Constituent units derived from alkyl (meth)acrylates with an alkyl group having 4 or more carbon atoms and constituent units derived from hydroxyl-containing monomers. In the above-mentioned acrylic polymer, relative to the total amount of constituent units, the The content of the constituent units derived from the monomer is 1-35% by mass, the above-mentioned crosslinking agent is an isocyanate-based crosslinking agent, and the above-mentioned maximum height roughness (Rz) of the first surface of the substrate is 0.01-8 μm.

◇保護膜形成用複合片之製造方法 上述保護膜形成用複合片係例如藉由以下製造方法(本說明書中亦稱「製造方法(S1)」)來製造,其包括:依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序來製作在其厚度方向積層而構成的積層片之步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片製作步驟(1)」);以及將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓狀態下保存的步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片保存步驟」)。 各層(基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜)的形成方法係如前所說明。 以下,針對上述製造方法(S1),依照各步驟分別進行更詳細說明。◇Manufacturing method of composite sheet for protective film formation The above composite sheet for forming a protective film is produced, for example, by the following production method (also referred to as "manufacturing method (S1)" in this specification) which includes: The step of producing a laminated sheet formed by laminating layers in its thickness direction (also referred to as "laminated sheet production step (1)" in this specification); and the step of storing the above-mentioned laminated sheet under pressure in its thickness direction (in this Also known as "Laminate Preservation Step"). The formation method of each layer (substrate, adhesive layer, and protective film forming film) is as described above. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned manufacturing method (S1) will be described in more detail according to each step.

◎製造方法(S1) <<積層片製作步驟(1)>> 上述積層片製作步驟(1)中,製作依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序,在其厚度方向上積層構成的積層片。 本步驟中,例如藉由依對應上述層(基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜等)位置關係的方式進行積層,而製作具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造的積層片。 另外,本說明書中,所謂「積層片」在無特別聲明前提下,係指如上述具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造,且尚未施行上述積層片保存步驟者。◎Manufacturing method (S1) <<Laminate production steps (1)>> In the above-mentioned laminated sheet production step (1), a laminated sheet formed by laminating layers in the thickness direction in the order of the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film is produced. In this step, for example, by laminating so as to correspond to the positional relationship of the above layers (base material, adhesive layer, protective film forming film, etc.), a laminated sheet having the same laminated structure as the target protective film forming composite sheet is produced. In addition, in this specification, the so-called "laminated sheet" refers to a laminated sheet having the same laminated structure as the target protective film forming composite sheet as described above, and the above-mentioned laminated sheet preservation step has not been performed unless otherwise specified.

例如製造支撐片時,當在基材上積層黏著劑層時,只要在基材上塗佈上述黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥便可。For example, when laminating an adhesive layer on a base material in the production of a support sheet, it is only necessary to apply the above-mentioned adhesive composition on the base material and dry it if necessary.

另一方面,例如當在已積層於基材上的黏著劑層上,進一步積層保護膜形成用薄膜的情況,在黏著劑層上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,便可直接形成保護膜形成用薄膜。保護膜形成用薄膜以外的層亦是使用供形成此層的組成物,依照同樣方法,便可在黏著劑層上積層此層。依此,當使用任一組成物,形成連續的雙層積層構造的情況,在由上述組成物所形成的層上,進一步塗佈組成物便可形成新的層。但,在這2層之後才積層的層,較好預先在其他剝離薄膜上使用上述組成物形成,再將會與此已形成層中與上述剝離薄膜接觸側的相反側的露出面,與已形成的剩餘層的露出面貼合,可形成連續雙層積層構造。此時,上述組成物以塗佈於剝離薄膜的剝離處理面上為佳。剝離薄膜係只要在積層構造形成後,視需要去除便可。On the other hand, for example, when a film for forming a protective film is further laminated on an adhesive layer that has been laminated on a base material, the protective film can be formed directly by coating the composition for forming a protective film on the adhesive layer. Use film. Layers other than the film for forming a protective film also use the composition for forming this layer, and this layer can be laminated on the adhesive layer by the same method. Accordingly, when any composition is used to form a continuous two-layer laminate structure, a new layer can be formed by further coating the composition on the layer formed by the above composition. However, the layer that is laminated after these two layers is preferably formed in advance using the above-mentioned composition on another release film, and then the exposed surface of the formed layer opposite to the side that is in contact with the above-mentioned release film is separated from the already formed layer. The exposed surfaces of the formed remaining layers are bonded to form a continuous two-layer laminate structure. In this case, it is preferable to coat the above-mentioned composition on the release-treated surface of the release film. The release film may be removed as necessary after the laminated structure is formed.

例如當製造在基材上積層黏著劑層、在上述黏著劑層上積層保護膜形成用薄膜而成的保護膜形成用複合片(支撐片係基材與黏著劑層之積層物的保護膜形成用複合片)時,在基材上塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在基材上積層黏著劑層,另外在剝離薄膜上塗佈保護膜形成用組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成保護膜形成用薄膜。然後,將此保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面,與已積層於基材上的黏著劑層露出面貼合,使保護膜形成用薄膜積層於黏著劑層上,便可獲得上述積層片。For example, when manufacturing a composite sheet for protective film formation in which an adhesive layer is laminated on a base material and a film for forming a protective film is laminated on the adhesive layer (the support sheet is a laminate of the base material and the adhesive layer) When using a composite sheet), the adhesive composition is applied on the substrate, and dried if necessary, and the adhesive layer is laminated on the substrate, and the composition for forming a protective film is applied on the release film, and dried if necessary. , and a film for forming a protective film is formed on the release film. Then, the exposed surface of the protective film-forming film is bonded to the exposed surface of the adhesive layer laminated on the substrate, and the protective film-forming film is laminated on the adhesive layer to obtain the above-mentioned laminated sheet.

另外,當在基材上積層黏著劑層時,如上述,亦可取代在基材上塗佈黏著劑組成物的方法,改為在剝離薄膜上塗佈黏著劑組成物,視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成黏著劑層,再藉由將此層的露出面與基材其中一表面貼合,而將黏著劑層積層於基材上。 不管何種方法,剝離薄膜均係在形成目標積層構造後的任意時序中去除便可。In addition, when laminating the adhesive layer on the substrate, as described above, instead of applying the adhesive composition on the substrate, the adhesive composition may be applied on a release film and dried if necessary. An adhesive layer is formed on the release film, and the exposed surface of the layer is bonded to one of the surfaces of the substrate to laminate the adhesive layer on the substrate. Regardless of the method, the release film may be removed at any time after formation of the target laminated structure.

依此,構成保護膜形成用複合片的基材以外之層,均以預先形成於剝離薄膜上再貼合於目標層的表面之方法便可積層,因而視需要適當選擇採用此種步驟的層,便可製造上述積層片。According to this, the layers other than the base material constituting the composite sheet for forming a protective film can be laminated by pre-forming the release film and then laminating it on the surface of the target layer. Therefore, the layers that use this step are appropriately selected as needed. , the above-mentioned laminate can be manufactured.

例如保護膜形成用複合片,通常以在臨支撐片之一面的相反側的最表層(例如保護膜形成用薄膜)表面貼合剝離薄膜的狀態下進行保管。所以,在此剝離薄膜(較佳係剝離處理面)上,塗佈保護膜形成用組成物等供形成構成最表層的組成物,再視需要施行乾燥,而在剝離薄膜上形成構成最表層的層,再將剩餘的各層依照上述任一方法,積層於與此層中與剝離薄膜接觸側的相反側的露出面上,即便未去除剝離薄膜而維持貼合狀態仍可獲得上述積層片。For example, the composite sheet for forming a protective film is usually stored with a release film attached to the surface of the outermost layer (for example, a film for forming a protective film) opposite to the surface facing the support sheet. Therefore, on this release film (preferably, the release-treated surface), a composition for forming a protective film or the like is applied to form a composition constituting the outermost layer, and then dried as necessary to form a composition constituting the outermost layer on the release film. Layer, and then laminate the remaining layers on the exposed surface of the layer opposite to the side in contact with the release film according to any of the above methods, even if the release film is not removed and the bonded state is maintained, the laminated sheet can be obtained.

當保護膜形成用複合片係包括上述其他層的情況,只要在上述積層片製作步驟(1)的適合時序,以成為適當配置位置的方式,適當追加設置上述其層的步驟便可。When the composite sheet for forming a protective film includes the above-mentioned other layers, it is only necessary to appropriately add the step of providing the above-mentioned layers in an appropriate timing of the above-mentioned laminated sheet production step (1) so as to obtain an appropriate arrangement position.

積層片製作步驟(1)中所製作的上述積層片的形狀,並無特別的限定。例如可製作適於呈捲筒狀捲取的長條積層片,但亦可製作非為長條的其他形狀的積層片。The shape of the laminated sheet produced in the laminated sheet production step (1) is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to produce a long laminated sheet suitable for winding up in a roll shape, but it is also possible to produce a laminated sheet of other shapes than the long strip.

<<積層片保存步驟>> 上述積層片保存步驟中,將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓的狀態下保存。 本步驟中,將上述積層片在加壓狀態下保存的方法,可列舉例如:將長條的上述積層片捲取呈捲筒狀,在保持此已捲取的積層片狀態下,在將由捲取所生成的壓力施加於積層片單面或雙面狀態下保存的方法;針對未將長條的上述積層片捲取呈捲筒狀而維持展開狀態的積層片、或非為長條的上述積層片,在其單面或雙面施加壓力狀態下保管的方法等。<<Preservation steps of laminated sheet>> In the step of storing the above-mentioned laminated sheet, the above-mentioned laminated sheet is stored under pressure in its thickness direction. In this step, the method of storing the above-mentioned laminated sheet in a pressurized state may include, for example: winding the elongated above-mentioned laminated sheet into a roll shape, and keeping the rolled-up laminated sheet in the state of rolling The method in which the generated pressure is applied to one side or both sides of the laminated sheet and preserved; for the laminated sheet that is not rolled into a roll and maintained in an unfolded state, or the above-mentioned sheet that is not long A laminated sheet, a method of storing it with pressure applied to one or both sides thereof, etc.

將長條積層片捲取呈捲筒狀時,積層片以朝長邊方向進行捲取為佳。 捲取積層片時,例如捲取張力較佳係150~170N/m,捲取速度較佳係45~55m/min,捲取張力的漸縮比(taper ratio) (降低率)較佳係85~95%。藉由採用此種捲取條件,便可以更恰當的壓力加壓保存積層片。此種捲取條件係針對例如厚度100~300μm、寬度300~500mm、長度40~60m的積層片特別適用,惟積層片大小並不僅侷限於此。When winding up the long laminated sheet into a roll shape, it is preferable that the laminated sheet be wound up in the direction of the long side. When winding laminated sheets, for example, the winding tension is preferably 150~170N/m, the winding speed is preferably 45~55m/min, and the taper ratio (reduction rate) of winding tension is preferably 85 ~95%. By employing such winding conditions, the laminated sheet can be stored under more appropriate pressure. This kind of coiling condition is especially suitable for laminates with a thickness of 100-300 μm, a width of 300-500 mm, and a length of 40-60 m, but the size of the laminate is not limited to this.

積層片係例如可在常溫下或室溫下進行捲取,如後述,亦可在與對所捲取積層片施行加熱加壓保存時的同樣溫度條件下進行捲取。The laminated sheet can be wound, for example, at normal temperature or at room temperature, or it can be wound under the same temperature conditions as when the wound laminated sheet is stored under heat and pressure as described later.

呈捲筒狀捲取的積層片係可在常溫下或室溫下保存,但以在加熱狀態下保存為佳。藉由依此施行加熱加壓保存,便可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。The laminated sheet wound up in the form of a roll can be stored at normal temperature or at room temperature, but it is better to store it in a heated state. By storing under heat and pressure in this way, it is possible to obtain a protective film that is more excellent in laminarity between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the visibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet. Use composite sheets.

將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時,保存時的加熱溫度並無特別的限定,較佳係53~75℃、更佳係55~70℃、特佳係57~65℃。When winding the laminated sheet into a roll, the heating temperature during storage is not particularly limited, but is preferably 53-75°C, more preferably 55-70°C, and most preferably 57-65°C.

將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時的保存時間並無特別的限定,較佳係24~720小時(1~30天)、更佳係48~480小時(2~20天)、特佳係72~240小時(3~10天)。There is no special limit to the storage time when the laminated sheet is rolled into a roll, preferably 24-720 hours (1-30 days), more preferably 48-480 hours (2-20 days), and the best 72~240 hours (3~10 days).

呈捲筒狀捲取的積層片亦可例如將保護膜形成用薄膜與支撐片加工成特定形狀,再將依此加工的支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之複數片積層物,於其臨保護膜形成用薄膜之一面貼合於長條剝離薄膜,同時將此剝離薄膜長邊方向呈整齊排列配置。此情況的保護膜形成用薄膜以具有與半導體晶圓相同或幾近相同的平面形狀(通常係圓形狀) 為佳。又,此情況的支撐片較好具有與切割裝置中供固定支撐片用的夾具相同或幾近相同的外周的形狀。又,此情況,剝離薄膜的上述積層物貼合面中,以在短邊方向的周緣部附近依不會重疊上述積層物的方式設置帶狀片為佳。此帶狀片係在將積層片呈捲筒狀捲取時,供抑制上述積層物表面出現高度差(本說明書中亦稱「積層痕」)用。上述積層痕係因積層片捲筒中,上述積層物(經加工的支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜之積層物) 的積層位置在捲筒徑向上未一致,導致對上述積層物表面施加較高壓力造成。若上述帶狀片設置於上述周緣部附近,則不會對上述積層物表面施加此種較高壓力,便抑制出現上述積層痕。The laminated sheet wound up in the form of a roll can also be processed into a specific shape, such as a film for forming a protective film and a support sheet, and then a plurality of laminates of the film for forming a support sheet and a film for forming a protective film processed in this way can be placed next to it for protection. One side of the film-forming film was bonded to the elongated release film, and the release film was aligned in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the thin film for forming a protective film preferably has the same or almost the same planar shape (usually circular shape) as that of the semiconductor wafer. In addition, the support sheet in this case preferably has the same or almost the same outer peripheral shape as the jig for fixing the support sheet in the cutting device. Also, in this case, it is preferable to provide a belt-shaped sheet near the peripheral edge portion in the short side direction on the laminate bonding surface of the release film so as not to overlap the laminate. This belt-shaped sheet is used to suppress the level difference on the surface of the above-mentioned laminate (also referred to as "lamination mark" in this specification) when the laminate is wound up into a roll. The above-mentioned lamination marks are due to the fact that the lamination position of the above-mentioned laminate (the laminate of the processed support sheet and the film for protective film formation) is not consistent in the radial direction of the reel in the laminate sheet roll, resulting in a high pressure on the surface of the above-mentioned laminate. cause. If the belt-shaped sheet is provided near the peripheral portion, such a high pressure will not be applied to the surface of the layered product, and the occurrence of the layered layer marks will be suppressed.

當長條積層片非呈捲筒狀捲取而呈展開狀態時,以及積層片非為長條的情況,複數片的這些積層片以進一步積層保存為佳。而,依此將積層片積層時,以使複數片的這些積層片的方向與周緣部位置呈相互對準的狀態為佳。When the elongated laminated sheet is in an unfolded state instead of being wound in a roll, and when the laminated sheet is not long, it is preferable to store a plurality of these laminated sheets by further lamination. However, when laminating the laminated sheets in this way, it is preferable that the directions of the laminated sheets and the positions of the peripheral portions of the plurality of sheets are aligned with each other.

非為長條的積層片(換言之單片式積層片)的形狀與大小並無特別的限定。例如較好使用切割裝置,依適於單片半導體晶圓加工的方式,配合半導體晶圓的形狀與大小、切割裝置中供固定支撐片用的夾具的形狀與大小,調整積層片的形狀與大小。The shape and size of the non-elongated laminated sheet (in other words, single-piece laminated sheet) are not particularly limited. For example, it is better to use a cutting device to adjust the shape and size of the laminate according to the method suitable for processing a single semiconductor wafer, the shape and size of the semiconductor wafer, and the shape and size of the jig used to fix the support sheet in the cutting device. .

呈積層狀態的上述積層片係可在常溫下或室溫下保存,但以在加熱狀態下保存為佳。藉由依此施行加熱加壓保存,便可獲得黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性、以及保護膜或保護膜形成用薄膜隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性均更優異的保護膜形成用複合片。 再者,當對呈積層狀態的上述積層片施行加壓保存時,加熱溫度與保存時間均可設為與上述積層片呈捲筒狀捲取的情況相同。The above-mentioned laminated sheet in a laminated state can be stored at normal temperature or at room temperature, but is preferably stored under heating. By storing under heat and pressure in this way, it is possible to obtain a protective film that is more excellent in laminarity between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, and the visibility of the protective film or the film for forming a protective film through the support sheet. Use composite sheets. Furthermore, when the laminated sheet is stored under pressure, both the heating temperature and the storage time can be set to be the same as those in the case where the laminated sheet is wound up in a roll shape.

製造方法(S1)中,待積層片保存步驟結束後,藉由解除積層片的加壓、以及視需要的加熱,便可獲得目標之保護膜形成用複合片。In the production method (S1), after the step of storing the laminated sheet is completed, the target composite sheet for forming a protective film can be obtained by releasing the pressure of the laminated sheet and heating if necessary.

製造方法(S1)的積層片製作步驟(1)中,基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的積層(貼合)順序並無特別的限定,當預先製作支撐片(預先在基材上積層黏著劑層)、預先製作保護膜形成用薄膜、再於支撐片上積層保護膜形成用薄膜時,將支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜中之任一者或雙方,於將其積層之前,單獨依照與上述積層片情況相同方法施行加壓保存。藉由將積層前的支撐片單獨施行加壓保存,便可更有效抑制基材與黏著劑層間發生上述未貼合區域。又,藉由單獨將積層前的保護膜形成用薄膜施行加壓保存,便可降低保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜臨黏著劑層之面(第2面)的凹凸度(增加平滑度),俾提升保護膜形成用薄膜與保護膜的設計性。In the laminated sheet production step (1) of the production method (S1), the order of lamination (bonding) of the substrate, the adhesive layer, and the protective film forming film is not particularly limited. When laminating the adhesive layer on top of the protective film, prefabricating the film for forming the protective film, and then laminating the film for forming the protective film on the support sheet, either or both of the support sheet and the film for forming the protective film should be laminated before lamination. Separately, pressurized storage was performed in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned laminated sheet. By storing the support sheet before lamination under pressure alone, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned unbonded area between the base material and the adhesive layer. In addition, by separately storing the film for forming a protective film under pressure before lamination, the unevenness of the film for forming a protective film and the surface (second surface) of the protective film facing the adhesive layer (second surface) can be reduced (smoothness increased), To improve the design of protective film forming film and protective film.

即,上述保護膜形成用複合片亦可例如藉由以下製造方法(本說明書中亦稱「製造方法(S2)」)來製造,其包括:在已積層基材與黏著劑層的支撐片之上述黏著劑層上積層保護膜形成用薄膜而製作依照基材、黏著劑層及保護膜形成用薄膜的順序在其厚度方向積層而構成的積層片之步驟(本說明書中亦稱「積層片製作步驟(2)」);以及將上述積層片在其厚度方向加壓的狀態下保存的步驟(保存步驟);其中,在上述積層片製作步驟(2)之前,進一步包括:將上述支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜其中任一者或雙方在其厚度方向施行加壓並保存的步驟(本說明書中,將保存支撐片的步驟稱「支撐片保存步驟」,將保存保護膜形成用薄膜的步驟稱「保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟」)。That is, the above-mentioned composite sheet for forming a protective film can also be produced, for example, by the following production method (also referred to as "production method (S2)" in this specification) including: The step of laminating the film for forming a protective film on the above-mentioned adhesive layer to produce a laminated sheet formed by laminating layers in the thickness direction of the base material, the adhesive layer, and the film for forming a protective film in this order (also referred to as "laminated sheet production" in this specification) Step (2)"); and the step of storing the above-mentioned laminated sheet under pressure in its thickness direction (preservation step); wherein, before the above-mentioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (2), further comprising: combining the above-mentioned support sheet with A step of applying pressure to one or both of the films for forming a protective film and storing them in the thickness direction (in this specification, the step of storing the support sheet is referred to as the "step of storing the support sheet", and the step of storing the film for forming a protective film It is called "thin film preservation step for protective film formation").

◎製造方法(S2) 上述製造方法(S2)係除了上述積層片製作步驟(1)係施行積層片製作步驟(2),更追加施行上述支撐片保存步驟及保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟中之任一步驟或雙方之外,與上述製造方法(S1)相同。◎Manufacturing method (S2) The above-mentioned manufacturing method (S2) is performed in addition to the above-mentioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (1), which is the implementation of the laminated sheet manufacturing step (2), and additionally implements either or both of the above-mentioned support sheet preservation step and protective film formation film preservation step. Otherwise, it is the same as the above-mentioned manufacturing method (S1).

<<積層片製作步驟(2)>> 上述積層片製作步驟(2),如上述,除了預先製作支撐片、預先製作保護膜形成用薄膜、依在支撐片上積層保護膜形成用薄膜的方式限定各層的積層順序之外,與製造方法(S1)的積層片製作步驟(1)相同。<<Laminate production steps (2)>> The above-mentioned laminated sheet manufacturing step (2), as described above, is similar to the manufacturing method ( The laminated sheet production step (1) of S1) is the same.

<<支撐片保存步驟、保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟>> 上述支撐片保存步驟與保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟係各自的保存標的物並非積層片而是支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜之外,可依照與製造方法(S1)的積層片保存步驟同樣地實行。 此情況,例如支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間,係與積層片的情況同樣,可設為24~720小時(1~30天)、48~480小時(2~20天)、及72~240小時(3~10天)中之任一者。<<Support Sheet Storage Procedure, Protective Film Formation Film Storage Procedure>> The support sheet storage step and the protective film formation film storage step described above are the same as the laminate storage step of the production method (S1), except that the object of preservation is not a laminate but a support sheet or a protective film formation film. carry out. In this case, for example, the storage time of the supporting sheet and the protective film forming film is the same as the case of the laminated sheet, and can be set to 24 to 720 hours (1 to 30 days), 48 to 480 hours (2 to 20 days), and Either of 72 to 240 hours (3 to 10 days).

另一方面,上述支撐片保存步驟與保護膜形成用薄膜保存步驟係分別如上述變更保存標的物之外,還有變更保存標的物(支撐片或保護膜形成用薄膜)的保存時間,除這些變更事項之外,依照與製造方法(S1)的積層片保存步驟同樣地實行。 此情況,例如支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜的保存時間係可設為12~720小時(0.5~30天)、12~480小時(0.5~20天)、及12~240小時(0.5~10天)中之任一者。但,此僅為上述保存時間一例。 [實施例]On the other hand, the step of storing the supporting sheet and the film storing step for forming a protective film are respectively as described above, in addition to changing the storage target, and changing the storage time of the target (support sheet or film for forming a protective film). Except for the changed matters, it was carried out in the same manner as the laminated sheet storage step of the manufacturing method (S1). In this case, for example, the storage time of the supporting sheet and the protective film forming film can be set to 12 to 720 hours (0.5 to 30 days), 12 to 480 hours (0.5 to 20 days), and 12 to 240 hours (0.5 to 10 days). days) any one of them. However, this is only an example of the storage time mentioned above. [Example]

以下,利用具體實施例,針對本發明進行更詳細說明。惟,本發明並不僅侷限於以下所示實施例。Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail by using specific embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown below.

<保護膜形成用組成物之製造原料> 用於保護膜形成用組成物的製造的原料,如下所示。 ・聚合體成分(A) (A)-1:由丙烯酸甲酯(85質量份)與丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯(15質量份)進行共聚合,而形成的丙烯酸系聚合體(重量平均分子量370000、玻璃轉移溫度6℃) ・熱硬化性成分(B1) (B1)-1:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER828」、環氧當量184~194g/eq) (B1)-2:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製「jER1055」、環氧當量800~900g/eq) (B1)-3:二環戊二烯型環氧樹脂(DIC公司製「Epicron HP-7200HH」、環氧當量255~260g/eq) ・熱硬化劑(B2) (B2)-1:二氰二胺(ADEKA公司製「ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS」、熱活性潛在性環氧樹脂硬化劑、活性氫量21g/eq) ・硬化促進劑(C) (C)-1:2-苯基-4,5-二羥甲基咪唑(四國化成工業公司製「Curezol 2PHZ-PW」) ・填充劑(D) (D)-1:二氧化矽填料(Admatechs公司製「SC2050MA」、經環氧系化合物施行表面修飾後的二氧化矽填料、平均粒徑0.5μm) ・偶合劑(E) (E)-1:3-胺基丙基三甲氧基矽烷(NUC公司製「A-1110」) ・著色劑(I) (I)-1:黑色顏料(大日精化公司製)<Raw materials for the production of protective film forming compositions> The raw materials used for the production of the composition for forming a protective film are as follows. ・Polymer component (A) (A)-1: an acrylic polymer formed by copolymerization of methyl acrylate (85 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (15 parts by mass) (weight average molecular weight 370000, glass transition temperature 6°C ) ・Thermosetting components (B1) (B1)-1: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER828" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 184~194g/eq) (B1)-2: Bisphenol A type epoxy resin ("jER1055" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 800~900g/eq) (B1)-3: Dicyclopentadiene-type epoxy resin ("Epicron HP-7200HH" manufactured by DIC Corporation, epoxy equivalent 255~260g/eq) ・Thermosetting agent (B2) (B2)-1: Dicyandiamide ("ADK HARDENER EH-3636AS" manufactured by ADEKA Corporation, thermally active latent epoxy resin hardener, active hydrogen content 21g/eq) ・Hardening Accelerator (C) (C)-1: 2-phenyl-4,5-dimethylimidazole ("Curezol 2PHZ-PW" manufactured by Shikoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ・Filler (D) (D)-1: Silica filler ("SC2050MA" manufactured by Admatechs Co., Ltd., a silica filler surface-modified with an epoxy compound, average particle size 0.5 μm) ・Coupling agent (E) (E)-1: 3-Aminopropyltrimethoxysilane ("A-1110" manufactured by NUC Corporation) ・Coloring agent (I) (I)-1: Black pigment (made by Dainichi Seika Co., Ltd.)

[實施例1] <支撐片之製造> (黏著劑組成物(I-4)之製造) 製造固形份濃度30質量%的非能量線硬化性黏著劑組成物(I-4),其含有丙烯酸系聚合體(100質量份、固形份)、與三官能基二異氰酸伸苯二甲酯系交聯劑(三井武田化學公司製「TAKENATE D110N」)(40質量份(固形份)),還含有甲乙酮、甲苯及醋酸乙酯的混合溶劑作為溶劑。上述丙烯酸系聚合體係由丙烯酸-2-乙基己酯(2EHA)(80質量份)及丙烯酸-2-羥乙酯(HEA)(20質量份)進行共聚合而成的重量平均分子量800000的預共聚物。[Example 1] <Manufacturing of support sheet> (Manufacture of Adhesive Composition (I-4)) A non-energy ray-curable adhesive composition (I-4) with a solid content concentration of 30% by mass was produced, which contained an acrylic polymer (100 parts by mass, solid content), and trifunctional diisocyanatoxylylene An ester-based crosslinking agent ("TAKENATE D110N" manufactured by Mitsui Takeda Chemical Co., Ltd.) (40 parts by mass (solid content)) also contained a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene, and ethyl acetate as a solvent. The above-mentioned acrylic polymer system is prepared by copolymerizing 2-ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) (80 parts by mass) and 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) (20 parts by mass) with a weight average molecular weight of 800000. copolymer.

(支撐片之製造) 使用聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製薄膜的單面經利用聚矽氧處理而施行剝離處理過的剝離薄膜(Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm),在其剝離處理面,塗佈上述所獲得黏著劑組成物(I-4),於120℃下施行2分鐘加熱乾燥,而形成非能量線硬化性黏著劑層。此時,依黏著劑層厚度成為4μm方式設定條件,塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)。(manufacturing of support sheet) Use a release film ("SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec Co., Ltd., thickness 38 μm) that has been treated with silicone on one side of a polyethylene terephthalate film, and apply to the release-treated surface. The adhesive composition (I-4) obtained above was heated and dried at 120° C. for 2 minutes to form a non-energy ray curable adhesive layer. At this time, conditions were set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer would be 4 μm, and the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied.

在聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)其中一表面,藉由使金屬輥的凹凸面在加熱狀態下旋轉而施行按壓,藉此製得其中一面為凹凸面、另一面為平滑面(亮澤面)的基材。針對此基材的凹凸面,根據JIS B 0601:2013測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz),結果為5μm。One surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics, thickness 80 μm) is pressed by rotating the uneven surface of a metal roller in a heated state, whereby one surface is uneven and the other surface is smooth (glossy surface) substrate. The maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013 on the uneven surface of this base material, and it was 5 μm.

其次,藉由在上述所獲得黏著劑層的露出面,貼合上述基材的凹凸面,獲得依照基材、黏著劑層及剝離薄膜的順序在其厚度方向積層的支撐片。所獲得的支撐片的寬度(換言之,基材與黏著劑層的寬度)係400mm。 依上述獲得本發明的支撐片。Next, by bonding the uneven surface of the base material to the exposed surface of the obtained adhesive layer, a support sheet is obtained in which the base material, the adhesive layer, and the release film are laminated in the thickness direction in this order. The width of the obtained support sheet (in other words, the width of the substrate and the adhesive layer) was 400 mm. The supporting sheet of the present invention was obtained as described above.

接著,針對此支撐片,馬上施行後述關於基材與黏著劑層間之未貼合區域的評價。又,將此支撐片維持此狀態而使用於後述的保護膜形成用複合片的製造。Next, the evaluation about the unbonded area between the base material and the adhesive layer, which will be described later, was immediately performed on this support sheet. Moreover, this support sheet was used for manufacture of the composite sheet for protective film formation mentioned later, maintaining this state.

<保護膜形成用複合片之製造> (保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)之製造) 使聚合體成分(A)-1(150質量份)、熱硬化性成分(B1)-1(60質量份)、(B1)-2(10質量份)、(B1)-3(30質量份)、(B2)-1(2質量份)、硬化促進劑(C)-1(2質量份)、填充劑(D)-1(320質量份)、偶合劑(E)-1(2質量份)及著色劑(I)-1(18質量份),溶解或分散於甲乙酮、甲苯及醋酸乙酯的混合溶劑,在23℃下施行攪拌,而獲得固形份濃度51質量%的熱硬化性保護膜形成用組成物(III-1)。另外,此處所示摻合量全部均指「固形份量」。<Manufacture of composite sheet for protective film formation> (Manufacture of protective film forming composition (III-1)) Make polymer component (A)-1 (150 mass parts), thermosetting component (B1)-1 (60 mass parts), (B1)-2 (10 mass parts), (B1)-3 (30 mass parts ), (B2)-1 (2 mass parts), hardening accelerator (C)-1 (2 mass parts), filler (D)-1 (320 mass parts), coupling agent (E)-1 (2 mass parts parts) and coloring agent (I)-1 (18 parts by mass), dissolved or dispersed in a mixed solvent of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and ethyl acetate, and stirred at 23°C to obtain a thermosetting solid concentration of 51% by mass. Composition (III-1) for forming a protective film. In addition, all the blending amounts shown here mean "solid content".

(保護膜形成用薄膜之製造) 使用聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯製薄膜單面經聚矽氧處理施行剝離處理過的剝離薄膜(第2剝離薄膜、Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm),在其剝離處理面使用刀塗機塗佈上述所獲得的保護膜形成用組成物(III-1),於100℃下施行2分鐘乾燥,便製得厚度25μm的熱硬化性保護膜形成用薄膜。(Manufacture of film for protective film formation) Use a release film (second release film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec Co., Ltd., thickness 38 μm) that has been released by silicone treatment on one side of a polyethylene terephthalate film, and use it on the release-treated surface The protective film-forming composition (III-1) obtained above was coated with a knife coater, and dried at 100° C. for 2 minutes to obtain a thermosetting protective film-forming film with a thickness of 25 μm.

再者,在所獲得的保護膜形成用薄膜未設有第2剝離薄膜之一側的露出面,貼合剝離薄膜(第1剝離薄膜、Lintec公司製「SP-PET381031」、厚度38μm)的剝離處理面,便獲得在保護膜形成用薄膜其中一面上設有第1剝離薄膜、在另一面上設有第2剝離薄膜的積層薄膜。所獲得的積層薄膜的寬度(換言之,保護膜形成用薄膜、第1剝離薄膜及第2剝離薄膜的寬度)係400mm。Furthermore, on the exposed surface of the obtained protective film forming film on the side where the second release film was not provided, a release film (the first release film, "SP-PET381031" manufactured by Lintec Corporation, thickness 38 μm) was pasted. The surface is treated to obtain a laminated film in which the first release film is provided on one side of the film for forming a protective film and the second release film is provided on the other side. The width of the obtained laminated film (in other words, the width of the film for protective film formation, the 1st release film, and the 2nd release film) was 400 mm.

(保護膜形成用複合片之製造) 準備直徑5cm、截至距表面深度3mm的區域係由硬度50度的耐熱性聚矽氧橡膠構成之1組(2支)輥。 從上述所獲得的支撐片的黏著劑層除去剝離薄膜。又,從上述所獲得的積層薄膜除去第1剝離薄膜。 然後,使上述經除去剝離薄膜而生成的黏著劑層露出面、與上述經除去第1剝離薄膜而生成的保護膜形成用薄膜露出面呈相對向,使這些支撐片與保護膜形成用薄膜重疊而形成積層物,同時將此積層物以0.3m/min的速度通過溫度設定在60℃的這些輥間之間隙,而以0.5MPa的壓力施行加熱按壓(加熱層壓)。藉此製得依照基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及第2剝離薄膜的順序在其厚度方向積層而構成之具有與目標保護膜形成用複合片相同積層構造的積層片(保存前的保護膜形成用複合片)。 所獲得的上述積層片的寬度(換言之係支撐片寬度)係400mm,保護膜形成用薄膜的外徑係330mm。(Manufacture of composite sheets for protective film formation) Prepare a set (two pieces) of rollers with a diameter of 5 cm and a region up to a depth of 3 mm from the surface, which is made of heat-resistant polysiloxane rubber with a hardness of 50 degrees. The release film was removed from the adhesive layer of the support sheet obtained above. Also, the first release film was removed from the laminated film obtained above. Then, the exposed surface of the adhesive layer produced by removing the release film and the exposed surface of the film for forming a protective film produced by removing the first release film are opposed to each other, and these support sheets are overlapped with the film for forming a protective film. While forming a laminate, the laminate was passed at a speed of 0.3 m/min through a gap between these rolls set at a temperature of 60° C., and heated and pressed at a pressure of 0.5 MPa (heated lamination). In this way, a laminated sheet having the same laminated structure as the target protective film forming composite sheet (before storage Composite sheet for protective film formation). The width of the obtained laminated sheet (in other words, the width of the support sheet) was 400 mm, and the outer diameter of the film for forming a protective film was 330 mm.

其次,將依上述所獲得全體大小400mm×50m的積層片,將其長邊方向設為捲取方向,在捲取張力160N/m、捲取速度50m/min、捲取張力的漸縮比90%的條件下,捲繞於ABS樹脂的芯上,而捲取呈捲筒狀。此時,依基材在輥的徑向上朝外側的方式(換言之,使第2剝離薄膜接觸於芯),捲取積層片。 其次,將此捲筒狀積層片在空氣環境下、60℃溫度條件下,靜置保存7天(168小時)。 依上述,獲得具有圖2所示構造的本發明保護膜形成用複合片。Next, take the laminated sheet with an overall size of 400mm×50m obtained above, set its long side direction as the winding direction, and set the winding tension at 160N/m, the winding speed at 50m/min, and the tapering ratio of winding tension at 90 Under the condition of %, it is wound on the core of ABS resin, and the winding is in the form of a roll. At this time, the laminated sheet is wound up so that the base material faces outward in the radial direction of the roll (in other words, the second release film is brought into contact with the core). Next, this roll-shaped laminated sheet was left to stand for 7 days (168 hours) under the temperature condition of 60° C. in an air environment. As described above, a composite sheet for forming a protective film of the present invention having the structure shown in FIG. 2 was obtained.

其次,針對經在此種加熱加壓條件下完成保存後的本發明保護膜形成用複合片,施行以下所示項目的評價。Next, the evaluation of the items shown below was performed about the composite sheet for protective film formation of this invention which completed storage under such heating and pressurization conditions.

<支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之評價> (黏著劑層厚度之測定) 從上述所獲得的保護膜形成用複合片的5個地方,切取大小3mm×3mm的試驗片。此5個地方的切取位置係設為在圓形狀保護膜形成用薄膜中,相當於中心處的1個地方,以及靠近周緣部位且相對於此中心處幾乎呈點對稱位置的4個地方。這5個地方的切取位置中,相當於中心處的1個地方、與其餘靠近周緣部位的4個地方之中心間距離係100mm。<Evaluation of support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet> (Measurement of Adhesive Layer Thickness) A test piece having a size of 3 mm×3 mm was cut out from five places of the composite sheet for forming a protective film obtained above. The cutting positions of these five places are one place corresponding to the center in the film for forming a circular protective film, and four places near the peripheral part which are almost point-symmetrical with respect to the center. Among the cutting positions of these 5 places, the distance between the center of 1 place corresponding to the center and the other 4 places near the periphery is 100mm.

使用截面試料製作裝置(JEOL公司製「截面拋光機SM-09010」),將間歇式閘門的條件設為「in」10秒、「out」5秒,離子源電壓設為3kV、總拋光時間設為24小時,從上述試驗片形成其截面。新形成的截面係設為每1片試驗片僅有1面。Using a cross-section sample preparation device ("Section Polisher SM-09010" manufactured by JEOL Corporation), set the conditions of the intermittent gate to "in" for 10 seconds and "out" for 5 seconds, the ion source voltage to 3 kV, and the total polishing time to For 24 hours, its cross section was formed from the above-mentioned test piece. The newly formed cross-section is set to have only one side per one test piece.

使用掃描式電子顯微鏡(SEM),觀察這5個試驗片新形成的截面,在每個各試驗片分別求取黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值。此時試驗片的截面觀察區域係上述截面寬度方向的1mm區域。 然後,將這些最小值的平均值採用為黏著劑層的S值,並將這些最大值的平均值採用為黏著劑層的L值。結果如表1所示。The newly formed cross sections of these five test pieces were observed using a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the minimum and maximum values of the thickness of the adhesive layer were determined for each test piece. At this time, the cross-sectional observation area of the test piece is the 1 mm area in the cross-sectional width direction. Then, the average value of these minimum values was adopted as the S value of the adhesive layer, and the average value of these maximum values was adopted as the L value of the adhesive layer. The results are shown in Table 1.

(保護膜之刻印檢視性評價) 從上述所獲得的保護膜形成用複合片中除去第2剝離薄膜,將藉此生成的保護膜形成用薄膜的露出面(臨黏著劑層側的相反側的面),貼附於8吋半導體晶圓的背面。此時的貼附係使用貼膜機(Lintec公司製「RAD2700」)實行。藉此,製得依照基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及半導體晶圓的順序在其厚度方向積層而構成的第1積層構造體。(Evaluation of marking inspection of protective film) Remove the second release film from the protective film forming composite sheet obtained above, and attach the exposed surface (the surface opposite to the adhesive layer side) of the protective film forming film thus produced to an 8-inch semiconductor the backside of the wafer. Attachment at this time was carried out using a film laminating machine ("RAD2700" manufactured by Lintec Corporation). Thereby, the first laminated structure formed by laminating the base material, the adhesive layer, the film for forming a protective film, and the semiconductor wafer in the thickness direction in this order is obtained.

其次,使用雷射刻印裝置(EO TECHNICS公司製「CSM300M」),藉由對第1積層構造體中的保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的面(第2面),隔著支撐片照射雷射光而施行刻印。此時刻印0.3mm×0.2mm大小的文字。Next, using a laser marking device (“CSM300M” manufactured by EO TECHNICS Co., Ltd.), irradiate the surface (second surface) of the film for forming a protective film in the first laminated structure on the side facing the adhesive layer through the support sheet. Marking is performed by laser light. At this moment, the characters with the size of 0.3mm×0.2mm are printed.

其次,隔著支撐片目視觀察此保護膜形成用薄膜的刻印(雷射刻印),依照下述基準評價刻印(文字)的檢視性。結果如表1所示。此處評價的保護膜形成用薄膜之刻印檢視性,係視為等同保護膜的刻印檢視性。 A:刻印清晰、可輕易檢視。 B:刻印稍微模糊、無法輕易檢視。 C:刻印不清晰、無法檢視。Next, the mark (laser mark) of this film for protective film formation was observed visually through a support sheet, and the visibility of mark (character) was evaluated according to the following reference|standard. The results are shown in Table 1. The marking visibility of the film for forming a protective film evaluated here is considered to be equivalent to that of a protective film. A: The engraving is clear and can be easily inspected. B: The imprint is slightly blurred and cannot be easily seen. C: Marking is not clear and cannot be viewed.

其次,從此保護膜形成用薄膜撕開支撐片(基材與黏著劑層)。然後,使用光學顯微鏡(KEYENCE公司製),測定在保護膜形成用薄膜上所形成的刻印(文字)的線條粗細度。其結果,線條粗細度達40μm以上,呈清晰刻印。Next, the support sheet (substrate and adhesive layer) is torn off from the film for protective film formation. Then, using an optical microscope (manufactured by KEYENCE Corporation), the line thickness of the inscription (character) formed on the film for protective film formation was measured. As a result, the line thickness was 40 μm or more, and it was clearly marked.

(基材與黏著劑層間之密接性評價) 根據JIS K 5600-5-6,使用旋切機(rotary cutter),在支撐片的黏著劑層賦予的1mm四方格子狀計100小方格,經壓貼黏貼帶(賽珞膠帶[NICHIBAN公司製、註冊商標])後,依約60角度、0.5秒~1.0秒撕開黏貼帶,計數100小方格中殘留的小方格數,藉此針對基材與黏著劑層間之密接性施行測試。密接性評價係依照下述判定基準實行。然後依照下述基準,施行基材與黏著劑層之密接性的相關評價。結果如表1所示。 A:殘留小方格數達90以上。 B:殘留小方格數達70以上且未滿90。 C:殘留小方格數未滿70。(Evaluation of Adhesion Between Substrate and Adhesive Layer) According to JIS K 5600-5-6, using a rotary cutter (rotary cutter), the 1mm square grid shape of 100 small squares is given to the adhesive layer of the support sheet, and the adhesive tape (cello tape [manufactured by NICHIBAN Co., Ltd.] , registered trademark]), tear off the adhesive tape at an angle of about 60 degrees, 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, and count the number of small squares remaining in the 100 small squares, so as to test the adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive layer. Adhesive evaluation was carried out in accordance with the following judgment criteria. Then, according to the following criteria, the evaluation related to the adhesiveness of a base material and an adhesive layer was performed. The results are shown in Table 1. A: The number of remaining small squares is 90 or more. B: The number of remaining small squares is more than 70 but less than 90. C: The number of remaining small squares is less than 70.

<支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之製造、以及支撐片與保護膜形成用複合片之評價> [實施例2] 在聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)其中一表面,藉由使金屬輥的凹凸面在加熱狀態下旋轉而施行按壓,藉此製得其中一面為凹凸面、另一面為平滑面(亮澤面)的基材。此時所使用的金屬輥凹凸面的凹凸度係小於實施例1所使用金屬輥的凹凸面的凹凸度。針對所獲得的基材的凹凸面,根據JIS B 0601:2013測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz),結果為1.5μm。<Manufacture of support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet, and evaluation of support sheet and protective film forming composite sheet> [Example 2] One surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics, thickness 80 μm) is pressed by rotating the uneven surface of a metal roller in a heated state, whereby one surface is uneven and the other surface is smooth (glossy surface) substrate. The unevenness of the uneven surface of the metal roller used at this time was smaller than the unevenness of the uneven surface of the metal roller used in Example 1. The maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013 with respect to the uneven surface of the obtained substrate, and was 1.5 μm.

使用上述所獲得基材與依黏著劑層厚度非為4μm而是5μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片,並評價。 然後,使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。Except for applying the adhesive composition (I-4) using the substrate obtained above and setting the conditions such that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 5 μm, a support sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, and Evaluation. Then, except using such a support sheet, the composite sheet for protective film formation was manufactured by the method similar to Example 1, and it evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[實施例3] 在聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)其中一表面,藉由使金屬輥的凹凸面在加熱狀態下旋轉而施行按壓,藉此製得其中一面為凹凸面、另一面為平滑面(亮澤面)的基材。此時所使用的金屬輥凹凸面的凹凸度係大於實施例1所使用金屬輥的凹凸面的凹凸度。針對所獲得的基材的凹凸面,根據JIS B 0601:2013測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz),結果為8μm。[Example 3] One surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics, thickness 80 μm) is pressed by rotating the uneven surface of a metal roller in a heated state, whereby one surface is uneven and the other surface is smooth (glossy surface) substrate. The unevenness of the uneven surface of the metal roller used at this time was larger than the unevenness of the uneven surface of the metal roller used in Example 1. The maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013 with respect to the uneven surface of the obtained substrate, and it was 8 μm.

使用上述所獲得基材與依黏著劑層厚度非為4μm而是10μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片,並評價。 然後,使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。Except for applying the adhesive composition (I-4) using the substrate obtained above and setting the conditions such that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 10 μm, a support sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, and Evaluation. Then, except using such a support sheet, the composite sheet for protective film formation was manufactured by the method similar to Example 1, and it evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例1] 依黏著劑層厚度非為4μm而是5μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)以及未施行基材凹凸面的形成處理之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片,並評價。 然後,使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative example 1] A support was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, except that the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied and the uneven surface of the substrate was not formed under the conditions set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 5 μm. slice, and evaluate. Then, except using such a support sheet, the composite sheet for protective film formation was manufactured by the method similar to Example 1, and it evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例2] 依黏著劑層厚度非為4μm而是3μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片,並評價。 然後,使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。[Comparative example 2] A support sheet was produced and evaluated in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the conditions were set so that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 3 μm, and the adhesive composition (I-4) was applied. Then, except using such a support sheet, the composite sheet for protective film formation was manufactured by the method similar to Example 1, and it evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[比較例3] 在聚丙烯製薄膜(三菱樹脂公司製、厚度80μm)其中一表面上,藉由使金屬輥的凹凸面在加熱狀態下旋轉而施行按壓,藉此製得其中一面為凹凸面、另一面為平滑面(亮澤面)的基材。此時所使用金屬輥凹凸面的凹凸度係大於實施例1所使用金屬輥的凹凸面的凹凸度。針對所獲得的基材的凹凸面,根據JIS B 0601:2013測定最大高度粗糙度(Rz),結果為14μm。[Comparative example 3] On one surface of a polypropylene film (manufactured by Mitsubishi Plastics Co., Ltd., thickness 80 μm), pressing is performed by rotating the concave-convex surface of a metal roller in a heated state, whereby one surface is concave-convex and the other surface is smooth. Surface (shiny surface) base material. The unevenness of the uneven surface of the metal roller used at this time is larger than that of the uneven surface of the metal roller used in Example 1. The maximum height roughness (Rz) was measured in accordance with JIS B 0601:2013 with respect to the uneven surface of the obtained base material, and was 14 μm.

使用上述所獲得基材與依黏著劑層厚度非為4μm而是8μm的方式設定條件而塗佈黏著劑組成物(I-4)之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造支撐片,並評價。 然後,使用此種支撐片之外,依照與實施例1同樣的方法製造保護膜形成用複合片,並評價。 結果如表1所示。Except for applying the adhesive composition (I-4) using the substrate obtained above and setting the conditions such that the thickness of the adhesive layer was not 4 μm but 8 μm, a support sheet was produced in the same manner as in Example 1, and Evaluation. Then, except using such a support sheet, the composite sheet for protective film formation was manufactured by the method similar to Example 1, and it evaluated. The results are shown in Table 1.

[表1]

Figure 108109742-A0304-0001
[Table 1]
Figure 108109742-A0304-0001

由上述結果得知,關於實施例1~3,黏著劑層的L值/S值達1.5以上(1.5~3.0),基材與黏著劑層間之密接性特優。又,這些實施例的黏著劑層之L值/S值在3.0以下(1.5~3.0),保護膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)的刻印檢視性特優。From the above results, it can be seen that for Examples 1-3, the L value/S value of the adhesive layer is above 1.5 (1.5-3.0), and the adhesion between the substrate and the adhesive layer is excellent. Moreover, the L value/S value of the adhesive layer of these Examples is 3.0 or less (1.5-3.0), and the marking visibility of a protective film (thin film for protective film formation) is excellent.

相對於此,比較例1的黏著劑層之L值/S值係1.0,基材與黏著劑層間之密接性差。所以,基材與黏著劑層間有出現剝離情形。On the other hand, the L value/S value of the adhesive layer of Comparative Example 1 was 1.0, and the adhesiveness between the base material and the adhesive layer was poor. Therefore, there is a situation of peeling between the substrate and the adhesive layer.

再者,比較例2與3的黏著劑層之L值/S值分別為5.0、7.0,保護膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)隔著支撐片的刻印檢視性差。In addition, the L value/S value of the adhesive layer of Comparative Examples 2 and 3 was 5.0 and 7.0, respectively, and the marking visibility of the protective film (thin film for protective film formation) via the support sheet was poor.

再者,實施例1~3的黏著劑層之S值達2μm以上(2~7μm),雖數據未特別顯示,但黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜間之積層性優異。又,這些實施例的黏著劑層之L值係8μm以下(2~7μm),保護膜(保護膜形成用薄膜)的刻印檢視性更優異。Furthermore, the S value of the adhesive layer of Examples 1-3 is 2 μm or more (2-7 μm), although the data is not particularly shown, but the lamination property between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film is excellent. Moreover, the L value of the adhesive layer of these Examples is 8 micrometers or less (2-7 micrometers), and the marking visibility of a protective film (thin film for protective film formation) is more excellent.

另外,關於實施例1~3,在基材與黏著劑層之間、黏著劑層與保護膜形成用薄膜之間均完全沒有未貼合區域,或者即便有但層間距離小,保護膜形成用複合片具有良好特性。 再者,關於實施例1~3,保護膜形成用薄膜第2面的凹凸度小,保護膜形成用薄膜的外觀優異,可形成設計性高的保護膜。 (產業上之可利用性)In addition, in Examples 1 to 3, there is no unbonded area between the base material and the adhesive layer, and between the adhesive layer and the film for forming a protective film, or even if there is, the distance between layers is small, and the area for forming a protective film is small. The composite sheet has good properties. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 3, the unevenness of the second surface of the protective film-forming film was small, the appearance of the protective film-forming film was excellent, and a protective film with high designability could be formed. (industrial availability)

本發明係可利用於半導體裝置之製造。The present invention is applicable to the manufacture of semiconductor devices.

1A,1B,1C‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 10‧‧‧支撐片 10a‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜側的面(第1面) 10b‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜側的相反側的面(第2面) 11‧‧‧基材 11a‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層側的面(第1面、凹凸面) 11b‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層側的相反側的面(第2面) 12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12a‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材側的相反側的面(第1面) 12b‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材側的面(第2面) 13,23‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜 13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的相反側的面(第1面) 13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的面(第2面) 15‧‧‧剝離薄膜 16‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層 16a‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜之一面 23b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的面(第2面) 91,92‧‧‧未貼合區域 Ta‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度 Ta1‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度最小值 Ta2‧‧‧黏著劑層厚度最大值1A, 1B, 1C‧‧‧Composite sheet for protective film formation 10‧‧‧Support sheet 10a‧‧‧Support sheet facing the protective film forming film side (first surface) 10b‧‧‧Support sheet facing protective film formation The surface on the opposite side to the film side (second surface) 11‧‧‧substrate 11a‧‧‧the surface of the substrate on the side facing the adhesive layer (first surface, concave-convex surface) 11b‧‧‧substrate facing the adhesive layer The surface on the opposite side (the second surface) 12‧‧‧adhesive layer 12a‧‧‧the surface (first surface) on the opposite side of the adhesive layer facing the substrate side 12b‧‧‧adhesive layer facing the substrate side Surface (second surface) 13, 23‧‧‧film for forming protective film 13a‧‧‧surface (first surface) on the opposite side of the film for forming protective film facing the adhesive layer side (first surface) 13b‧‧‧for forming protective film The surface of the film on the side facing the adhesive layer (second surface) 15‧‧‧peeling film 16‧‧‧adhesive layer for jigs 16a‧‧‧the adhesive layer for jigs is not in contact with the side 23b‧‧ of the film for forming a protective film ‧The surface of the protective film forming film facing the adhesive layer (the second surface ) 91,92 ‧‧‧Maximum thickness of adhesive layer

圖1係本發明一實施形態的支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片之示意剖視圖。 圖2係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片一起顯示之示意剖視圖。 圖3係本發明一實施形態的保護膜形成用複合片與支撐片一起顯示之示意剖視圖。 圖4係圖1所示支撐片及保護膜形成用複合片的放大剖視圖。Fig. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a support sheet and a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 2 is a schematic sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention together with a support sheet. Fig. 3 is a schematic sectional view showing a composite sheet for forming a protective film according to an embodiment of the present invention together with a support sheet. Fig. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the support sheet and the composite sheet for forming a protective film shown in Fig. 1 .

1A‧‧‧保護膜形成用複合片 1A‧‧‧Composite sheet for protective film formation

10‧‧‧支撐片 10‧‧‧Support piece

10a‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜側的面(第1面) 10a‧‧‧Support sheet facing the protective film forming film side (first surface)

10b‧‧‧支撐片臨保護膜形成用薄膜側的相反側的面(第2面) 10b‧‧‧The surface of the support sheet opposite to the film side for forming the protective film (second surface)

11‧‧‧基材 11‧‧‧Substrate

11a‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層側的面(第1面、凹凸面) 11a‧‧‧The surface of the substrate on the side facing the adhesive layer (the first surface, concave-convex surface)

11b‧‧‧基材臨黏著劑層側的相反側的面(第2面) 11b‧‧‧The surface on the opposite side of the substrate facing the side of the adhesive layer (second surface)

12‧‧‧黏著劑層 12‧‧‧adhesive layer

12a‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材側的相反側的面(第1面) 12a‧‧‧Adhesive layer on the side opposite to the base material side (first side)

12b‧‧‧黏著劑層臨基材側的面(第2面) 12b‧‧‧The surface of the adhesive layer facing the substrate side (second surface)

13‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜 13‧‧‧Film for protective film formation

13a‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的相反側的面(第1面) 13a‧‧‧The surface (first surface) of the film for forming a protective film on the side opposite to the side of the adhesive layer

13b‧‧‧保護膜形成用薄膜臨黏著劑層側的面(第2面) 13b‧‧‧The surface of the protective film forming film facing the adhesive layer (second surface)

15‧‧‧剝離薄膜 15‧‧‧Peeling film

16‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層 16‧‧‧Adhesive layer for jigs

16a‧‧‧夾具用接著劑層未接觸到保護膜形成用薄膜側的面 16a‧‧‧The adhesive layer for jigs is not in contact with the surface of the protective film forming film

Claims (4)

一種保護膜形成用複合片,係在支撐片中的黏著劑層上,設置保護膜形成用薄膜之保護膜形成用複合片,上述支撐片,係包括基材,且在上述基材上設有上述黏著劑層,其中,上述基材臨上述黏著劑層側的面係凹凸面;從上述支撐片的5個地方切取試驗片,針對該等5片試驗片分別求取黏著劑層厚度的最小值與最大值時,上述最大值的平均值(L值)相對於上述最小值的平均值(S值)之比率(L值/S值)係1.2以上且未滿5.0。 A composite sheet for forming a protective film, which is attached to an adhesive layer in a support sheet and provided with a thin film for forming a protective film. The above-mentioned support sheet includes a base material, and a The above-mentioned adhesive layer, wherein, the surface of the above-mentioned base material facing the above-mentioned adhesive layer is a concave-convex surface; test pieces are cut from 5 places of the above-mentioned support sheet, and the minimum thickness of the adhesive layer is calculated for these 5 test pieces. In the case of the maximum value and the maximum value, the ratio (L value/S value) of the average value (L value) of the above-mentioned maximum value to the average value (S value) of the above-mentioned minimum value is 1.2 or more and less than 5.0. 如申請專利範圍第1項之保護膜形成用複合片,其中上述黏著劑層直接接觸於上述基材的凹凸面。 The composite sheet for forming a protective film as claimed in claim 1, wherein the adhesive layer is in direct contact with the concave-convex surface of the substrate. 如申請專利範圍第1或2項之保護膜形成用複合片,其中上述支撐片在波長532nm或波長1064nm的光穿透率為30%以上。 For example, the composite sheet for forming a protective film in claim 1 or 2, wherein the light transmittance of the support sheet at a wavelength of 532nm or a wavelength of 1064nm is 30% or more. 一種具保護膜之半導體裝置的製造方法,其為使用如申請專利範圍第1~3項中任一項之保護膜形成用複合片之具保護膜之半導體裝置的製造方法,包含下述步驟:(1)製作依照基材、黏著劑層、保護膜形成用薄膜及半導體晶圓的順序在其厚度方向積層而構成的第1積層構造體之步驟,及(2)藉由對第1積層構造體中的保護膜形成用薄膜中黏著劑層側的面,隔著支撐片照射雷射光而施行刻印之步驟。 A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device with a protective film, which is a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device with a protective film using the composite sheet for forming a protective film according to any one of claims 1 to 3 of the patent application, comprising the following steps: (1) A step of producing a first laminated structure formed by laminating a base material, an adhesive layer, a film for forming a protective film, and a semiconductor wafer in the thickness direction in this order, and (2) by forming the first laminated structure The process of irradiating the surface of the adhesive layer side of the protective film forming film in the body with laser light through the support sheet to perform marking.
TW108109742A 2018-03-30 2019-03-21 Composite sheet for forming protective film TWI783131B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2018/013563 WO2019186990A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2018-03-30 Support sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
WOPCT/JP2018/013563 2018-03-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201946128A TW201946128A (en) 2019-12-01
TWI783131B true TWI783131B (en) 2022-11-11

Family

ID=68058595

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW108109742A TWI783131B (en) 2018-03-30 2019-03-21 Composite sheet for forming protective film

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7182610B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102519799B1 (en)
CN (1) CN111602229B (en)
TW (1) TWI783131B (en)
WO (1) WO2019186990A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111187576B (en) * 2020-01-03 2021-11-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Flexible display device and preparation method thereof
WO2021193935A1 (en) * 2020-03-27 2021-09-30 リンテック株式会社 Sheet for production of semiconductor device and method for producing semiconductor chip with film-form adhesive
JP7635044B2 (en) * 2021-03-25 2025-02-25 リンテック株式会社 Protective film forming film

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1450971A (en) * 2000-09-04 2003-10-22 旭化成株式会社 Adhesive wrap film
JP2010278297A (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Adhesive tape for fixing semiconductor and method for manufacturing the same
TW201741347A (en) * 2016-04-28 2017-12-01 琳得科股份有限公司 Film for forming a protective film and composite sheet for forming a protective film
TW201806767A (en) * 2016-04-28 2018-03-01 琳得科股份有限公司 Film for forming a protective film and composite sheet for forming a protective film
WO2018179475A1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-10-04 リンテック株式会社 Protection film-forming composite sheet

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5432853B2 (en) 1971-10-11 1979-10-17
JP3725801B2 (en) * 2001-01-31 2005-12-14 積水化学工業株式会社 Adhesive tape substrate and adhesive tape
JP5432853B2 (en) * 2010-07-30 2014-03-05 日東電工株式会社 Dicing tape-integrated film for semiconductor back surface, manufacturing method thereof, and manufacturing method of semiconductor device
JP6893500B2 (en) * 2016-03-24 2021-06-23 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for forming a protective film
JP6298226B1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-03-20 リンテック株式会社 Composite sheet for protective film formation

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1450971A (en) * 2000-09-04 2003-10-22 旭化成株式会社 Adhesive wrap film
JP2010278297A (en) * 2009-05-29 2010-12-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Adhesive tape for fixing semiconductor and method for manufacturing the same
TW201741347A (en) * 2016-04-28 2017-12-01 琳得科股份有限公司 Film for forming a protective film and composite sheet for forming a protective film
TW201806767A (en) * 2016-04-28 2018-03-01 琳得科股份有限公司 Film for forming a protective film and composite sheet for forming a protective film
WO2018179475A1 (en) * 2017-03-30 2018-10-04 リンテック株式会社 Protection film-forming composite sheet

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP7182610B2 (en) 2022-12-02
WO2019186990A1 (en) 2019-10-03
CN111602229A (en) 2020-08-28
KR20200138157A (en) 2020-12-09
KR102519799B1 (en) 2023-04-10
CN111602229B (en) 2024-06-21
JPWO2019186990A1 (en) 2021-04-22
TW201946128A (en) 2019-12-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JPWO2017163971A1 (en) Support sheet and composite sheet for protective film formation
TWI783131B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI731874B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI788543B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
JP6818009B2 (en) Composite sheet for forming a protective film
TWI822742B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
TWI812687B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
JP6805230B2 (en) Composite sheet for forming a protective film
TWI801532B (en) Supporting sheet and composite sheet for forming protective film
TWI856008B (en) Composite sheet for forming protective film and method for producing same
TW202003739A (en) Supporting sheet and method of manufacturing the same, and composite sheet for forming protective film and method of manufacturing the same